DataChief C20 Instruction

AD-0377 / Item number 0400151 /
DataChief  C20
Alarm and monitoring system
with process control and
power management
Instruction manual
Document revisions
Rev Date Written by Checked by Approved by

A 02.02.2002 KGr AHo KOP
B 20.11.2002 KGr AHo KOP
C 05.02.2003 KGr BW KOP
D
The original signatures are recorded in the company’s logistic database.

High voltage safety 1 Lay the victim flat on his back and loosen
warning
any tight clothing (collar, tie, belt etc.).
2 Open his mouth and check for and remove

The voltages used to power this equipment are any false teeth, chewing gum etc.
potentially lethal. Even 110 volts can kill.
3 Check if the victim is breathing. If not,
Whenever possible, the following precautionary check if his heart is beating. The pulse is
measures should be taken before any work is normally easily found in the main arteries of the
carried out inside the equipment:
neck, either side of the throat, up under the chin.
• Switch off all high-voltage power supplies.
If his heart is beating but he is not breathing,
• Check the operation of any door interlocks commence ARTIFICIAL RESPIRATION. If the
and any other safety devices. victim’s heart is not beating, commence
• Completely discharge all high-voltage EXTERNAL CARDIAC MASSAGE (ECM).
capacitors. Continue to shout for assistance till someone
It should be noted that interlocks and safety arrives.
devices are normally located only at regular
EXTERNAL CARDIAC MASSAGE
access points, and high voltages may be exposed
during dismantling. 1 Kneel beside the victim. Place the heel of
NEVER WORK ALONE ON one hand in the centre of his chest, at a position
HIGH-VOLTAGE EQUIPMENT! half way between the notch between the
collar-bones at the top of his chest, and the dip in
the breast-bone at the base of his rib cage. Place
FIRST AID IN THE EVENT OF the other hand on top of the first.
ELECTRIC SHOCK 2 Keeping the arms straight and using your
Normally, even a high voltage electric shock will entire weight, press down rapidly so that the
not kill instantly. The victim can still be revived breast bone is depressed four- five cm, then
release the pressure. Repeat rhythmically at a rate
even when his breathing and heart-beat have
of one cycle per second. This will be hard work,
ceased.
but keep going. His life depends on YOU. Do not
Could YOU save someone’s life? In the event of worry about breaking his ribs - these will heal if
electric shock, the correct actions, performed he survives.
quickly may well save the victim’s life. Make
sure you know what to do!
Immediate action
While shouting for help, remove the source of

power from the victim. Switch off the supply if
possible, or using a dry, non-conductive material
(rubber gloves, broom handle etc.) to insulate
yourself, separate the victim from the source. If
the voltage exceeds 1000 volts, switch off the
supply and be ready to catch the victim. Take
care- do not become a victim yourself.
Commence first aid on the spot. Continue to shout

for assistance till someone arrives.
ARTIFICIAL RESPIRATION Remove the victim to a hospital as soon as
1 Kneel besides the victim’s head. Place one possible, but do not interrupt the artificial
hand under his neck and lift, allowing his head to respiration and EMC cycles till his heart beat and
fall back. This will lift his tongue and open the air breathing returns.
passage in his throat.
If started quickly and performed correctly, the
2 Place the palm of the hand on his forehead
to maintain the ”chin-up” position. resuscitation methods described will keep a
sufficient volume of oxygenated blood flowing
3 Using the index finger and thumb of the
same hand, pinch the victim’s nostrils closed. trough the victims body to allow full recovery.
Open his mouth. Proficiency in the resuscitation methods can only
4 Take a deep breath and cover his mouth be achieved trough training. All personnel
with yours. Blow steadily into his lungs to expand concerned should attend courses on a regular
his chest. Remove your mouth from his to allow
basis. Remember, someone’s life could depend on
the air to escape from his chest. You should be
able to see his chest deflate. you.
5 Repeat the ”inflation-deflation” cycle at a
rate of about 12 cycles per minute till the victim
begins to breath normally again.
COMBINING EMC AND ARTIFICIAL DO YOU KNOW WHAT TO DO?

RESPIRATION
If you are alone, perform ONE cycle of artificial
respiration for every FIVE cycles of EMC. This
will be hard work, but keep going. His life
depends on YOU!
If there are other people available to help, one
should perform the EMC while one performs the
artificial respiration for every five cycles of EMC.
It will be much more efficient with two people.
Once the victim’s heart is beating and he is
breathing, roll him onto his side and support him
in that position. As consciousness returns he may
vomit, and this will allow any liquid to drain out
of his mouth.
Warnings and Cautions
WARNING Lethal voltages

This system is not fitted with safety interlocks and lethal voltages
may be exposed when access covers are removed. Only persons
qualified and authorised must remove covers and these persons
should always take extreme care once the covers are removed.
WARNING Fire
If a fire condition arises, emission of toxic fumes can be anticipated
from burning insulation, printed circuit boards, ETC.
WARNING Health hazard
When cleaning the inside of this system, do not inhale the dust. The
dust is a temporary health hazard, depending on individual
allergies.
Kongsberg Maritime Ship Systems AS disclaims any
responsibility for damage or injury caused by improper
installation, use or maintenance of the equipment.
Caution Electrostatic sensitive device
Certain semiconductive devices used in this equipment are liable
to damage due to static voltage. Observe all precautions for
handling of semiconductive sensitive devices.
Note This document
The information contained in this document is subject to change
without notice. Kongsberg Maritime Ship Systems AS shall not be
liable for errors contained herein or for incidental or consequential
damages in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of
this document.  2002 Kongsberg Maritime Ship Systems AS. All
rights reserved. No part of this work covered by the copyright
hereon may be reproduced or otherwise copied without prior
permission from Kongsberg Maritime Ship Systems AS.
Manufacturer Kongsberg Maritime Ship Systems AS

Bekkajordet 8 A
P.O. Box 1009
N--3194 Horten, NORWAY
Telephone switchboard: +47 33 03 20 00
Fax: +47 85 02 80 82
www.kongsberg.com
Purpose
The reader
This instruction manual describes how to use the DataChief C20 Alarm and monitoring
system with process control and power management controls and display facilities. It is
intended for system operators. He/she should be experienced in the operation of Alarm and
monitoring system with process control and power management and have basic knowledge
of personal computers or should have attended a Kongsberg Maritime Ship Systems
training course.
Note
Due to the flexible nature of DataChief C20 not all systems described in this manual are
relevant for all deliveries. DataChief C20 Alarm and monitoring system with process
control and power management is a registered trademark of Kongsberg Maritime Ship
Systems. Windows NT and Windows are either registered trademarks or trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Figure 1 DataChief  C20 Remote Operator Station

Instruction manual
Chapters
1 Functional description
This chapter presents a functional description of the DataChief  C20 Alarm
and monitoring system with process control and power management..
Refer to page 1.
2 Getting started
This chapter teaches you how to use the basic control functions of the
DataChief  C20. It is intended for personnel just starting to use the system.
Refer to page 58.
3 Alarm and monitoring system

This chapter contains step by step procedures for operation of the alarm and
monitoring system.
Refer to page 82.
4 Process control system

This chapter contains a full descriptions of the process control system for all
all operator station types.
Refer to page 150.
5 Power management system

This chapter contains a full descriptions of the power management system for
all operator station types.
Refer to page 186.
6 Reference guide
This chapter contain software-- related information that can be reached from
one or several different types of operator locations (ROS, LOS etc.) .
Refer to page 214.
7 Maintenance
This chapter explains how to keep the system in good working order and what
to do if the system fails.
Refer to page 231.
8 Replaceable parts
This chapter contains a list of replaceable parts including part numbers.
Drawings of the main units are found here.
Refer to page 271.
9 Appendix
This chapter contains abbreviations and references.
Refer to page 288.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 IX

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
Document history
The information on this page is for internal use.
Rev.A First edition.

Rev.B Included 6 months and yearly maintenance, ShipViewer user informa-
tion, how to use the service console, procedures for unit replacement,
how alarms are printed after a blackout, how to configure a new DPU
channel and information about the new VCC, C3 and C4 Distributed Pro-
cessing Units. Added section about password access. The manual is up-
dated to comply with software version DC 60052.07.04.
Rev.C Updated section about power management (AD- 0377 and AD- 0379).
Updated section about process control system (AD- 0377 and AD- 0378).
Added information about the Midi operator station. Included various
minor changes and corrections. Reorganized normal operating informa-
tion under thee main headings; Alarm and Monitoring, Process Control
and Power Management System. Updated the parts lists.
X AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Instruction manual
Table of contents
1 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.2 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.3 Design principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.3.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.3.2 Building blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1.3.3 Decentralised system architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
1.3.4 Centralised operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
1.4 System components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
1.4.1 Remote Operator Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
1.4.2 Midi operator station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
1.4.3 Local operator station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
1.4.4 Watch Bridge Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
1.4.5 Watch Cabin Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
1.4.6 ShipViewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
1.4.7 Distributed Processing Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
1.4.8 Gateways . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
1.5 Software components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
1.5.1 Humane Machine Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
1.5.2 System functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
1.5.3 Process control functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
1.5.4 Power management system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
1.6 Technical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
1.6.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
1.6.2 Operator Control Panel (OCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
1.6.3 Midi Operator Station (MOS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
1.6.4 Local Operator Station (LOS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
1.6.5 Watch Bridge Unit (WBU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
1.6.6 Watch Cabin Unit (WCU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
1.6.7 Remote Analogue Input (RAi--16) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
1.6.8 Remote Analogue Input (RAi--10tc) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
1.6.9 Remote Digital Input (RDi--32 & RDi--32a) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
1.6.10 Remote Analogue Output (RAo--8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
1.6.11 Remote Digital Output (RDo--16) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
1.6.12 Remote Input/Output (RIO--C1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 XI


1.6.16 Voltage Converter Controller (VCC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
1.6.17 Process Segment Starcoupler (PSS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
1.6.18 Dual Process Segment Controller (dPSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
2 GETTING STARTED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
2.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
2.2 Using the Remote Operator Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
2.2.1 Understanding the Operator Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
2.2.2 Systems without Operator Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
2.2.3 Understanding the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
1.2 Using the Midi Operator Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
1.2.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
1.2.2 Understanding the keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
1.2.3 Understanding the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
1.2.4 Menu overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
2.4 Using the Local Operator Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
2.4.1 Understanding the Local Operator Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
2.4.2 Menu structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
2.4.3 How to access menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
2.4.4 How to move between menu levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
2.4.5 How to move inside a menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
2.5 The watch calling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
2.5.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
2.5.2 How does the Watch Calling repeat alarm feature work . . . . . . . . . . . 76
2.6 Using the Watch Bridge Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
2.6.1 Explanation of controls and indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
2.6.2 How to adjust illumination for LED type panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
2.6.3 How to adjust illumination for LCD type panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
2.6.4 How to test the panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
2.7 Using the Watch Cabin Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
2.7.1 Explanation of controls and indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
2.7.2 How to respond to alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
2.7.3 How to adjust illumination for LED type panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
2.7.4 How to adjust illumination for LCD type panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
2.7.5 How to test the panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
XII AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Instruction manual
3 ALARM AND MONITORING SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

3.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
3.2 Remote Operator Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
3.2.1 How to handle alarm events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
3.2.2 How alarms are printed after a black--out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
3.2.3 How to display alarm summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
3.2.4 How to display alarm history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
3.2.5 How to display alarm group information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
3.2.6 How to display counters and reset counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
3.2.7 How to display offscan alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
3.2.8 How to toggle between group and alarm display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
3.2.9 How to acknowledge alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
3.2.10 How to set day, dusk or night viewing conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
3.2.11 How to print a Complete log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
3.2.12 How to print an Alarm Summery log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
3.2.13 How to print a Level Correction log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
3.2.14 How to print a Tank log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
3.2.15 How to print a Counters log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
3.2.16 How to print an Inhibit log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
3.2.17 How to print an Offscan log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
3.2.18 How to print Group log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
3.2.19 How to print a Selected points log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
3.2.20 How to stop a printout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
3.2.21 How to display system information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
3.2.22 About password access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
3.2.23 How to display Distributed Processing Unit information . . . . . . . . . . . 94
3.2.24 Info field enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
3.2.25 How to enable changing of Eng. unit/counts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
3.2.26 How to enable resetting of counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
3.2.27 How to override limitations to acknowledge alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
3.2.28 How to override limitations to control pumps and valves . . . . . . . . . . 97
3.2.29 How to silence the Operator Control Panel buzzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
3.2.30 How to set tags to offscan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
3.2.31 How to change alarm limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
3.2.32 How to change alarm delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
3.2.33 How to access the Watch Calling configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
3.2.34 How to set the On Duty engineer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 XIII

3.2.35 How to select the Watch Responsible location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

3.2.36 How to call the On Duty engineer or All engineers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
3.2.37 How to define the engineer qualifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
3.2.38 How to define watch calling Off--Duty mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
3.2.39 How to define Watch Calling panel groups for on duty engineers . . . . 105
3.2.40 How to change time zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
3.2.41 How to change system time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
3.2.42 How to make your own list of selected tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
3.2.43 How to change a list of selected tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
3.2.44 How to set the interval for selected points log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
3.2.45 How to make your own trend display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
3.2.46 How to make your own bargraph display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
3.2.47 How to change tag parameters for an analogue channel . . . . . . . . . . . 117
3.2.48 How to change tag parameters for a digital channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
3.2.49 How to change the Autolog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
3.2.50 How to change Deviation parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
2.2 Midi Operator Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
2.2.1 How to handle alarm events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
2.2.2 How to display alarm history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
2.2.4 How to display alarm group information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
2.2.5 How to set the keyboard and screen configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
2.2.6 How to change access level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
2.2.7 How to display information about DPUs, tags and tag details . . . . . . . 129
2.2.8 How to change tag parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
2.2.9 How to change alarm limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
2.2.10 How to change alarm delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
3.4 Local Operator Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
3.4.1 How to view alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
3.4.2 How to acknowledge alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
3.4.3 How to turn the sound off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
3.4.4 How to display and interpret alarm history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
3.4.5 How to display and interpret alarm details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
3.5 Watch calling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
3.5.1 How to receive a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
3.5.2 How to respond to alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
XIV AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Instruction manual
3.5.3 How to call the ON DUTY engineer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

3.5.4 How to transfer watch responsibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
3.5.5 How to accept watch responsibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
3.6 Watch Bridge Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
3.6.1 How to display alarm information when in off duty mode . . . . . . . . . 140
3.7 Watch Cabin Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
3.7.1 How to display alarm information when duty mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
3.8 Using ShipViewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
3.8.1 Main ShipViewer functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
3.8.2 Understanding the ShipViewer display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
3.8.3 Explanation to the displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
3.8.4 How to print displayed information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
3.8.5 How to save ShipViewer images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
3.8.6 How to view saved mimic diagram files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
4 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
4.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
4.2 About the process control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
4.3.1 How to operate a pump starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
4.3.2 How to operate a fan starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
4.3.3 How to operate a compressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
4.3.4 How to open or close valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
4.3.5 How to operate a PID controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
4.4 Local Operator Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
4.4.1 How to operate pumps or fans from the Local Operator Station . . . . . 180
4.4.2 How to operate valves from the Local Operator Station . . . . . . . . . . . 183
4 POWER MANAGEMENT SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
4.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
4.2 About the power management system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
4.3.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
4.3.2 How to operate a generator set with start/stop control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
4.3.3 How to operate a generator set without start/stop control . . . . . . . . . . 193
4.3.4 How to operate a generator set without start, stop with adjustable load setpoint
194
4.3.5 How to operate the main switchboard controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
4.3.6 How to operate a bus tie breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 XV

4.3.7 How to operate the one touch auto sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

3.2 Midi Operator Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
3.2.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
3.2.2 How to operate the main switchboard controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
3.2.3 How to operate a generator set with start/stop control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
3.2.4 How to operate a generator set without start/stop control . . . . . . . . . . 209
3.2.5 How to operate a generator set without start, stop with adjustable load setpoint
211
3.2.6 How to operate a bus tie breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
5 REFERENCE GUIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
5.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
5.2 Tag type overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
5.2.1 Basic tag types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
5.2.2 Analogue out tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
5.2.3 Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
5.3 Alarm and monitoring parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
5.3.1 Analogue input tag items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
5.3.2 Alarm and event limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
5.3.3 Filter time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
5.3.4 Dynamic deadband . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
5.3.5 Scaling parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
5.3.6 Counter input tag items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
5.3.7 Digital input tag items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
5.3.8 Exhaust mean value tag items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
5.3.9 Exhaust deviation tag items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
5.3.10 Common submenu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
5.3.11 Alarm submenu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
5.4 Engineers safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
5.4.1 Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
5.4.2 Local control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
5.4.3 Remote Operator Station control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
5.4.4 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
7 MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
7.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
6.2 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
6.3 Unit replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
6.3.1 Recommended tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
XVI AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Instruction manual
6.4 Preventive maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

6.4.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
6.4.2 Weekly maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
6.4.3 6--monthly maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
6.4.4 Yearly maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
6.5 Troubleshooting Remote Operator Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
6.5.1 How to use the Service console program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
6.5.2 How to set up a Remote Operator Station from an image file . . . . . . . 243
6.5.3 How to shut down a Remote Operator Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
6.5.4 How to replace colour graphics displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
6.5.5 How to replace printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
6.5.6 How to replace Operator Control Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
6.5.7 How to replace Remote Operator Station PCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
6.5.8 How to install the Remote Operator Station software . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
4.2 How to install the Midi Operator Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
4.2.1 Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
4.2.2 Cutout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
4.2.3 Electrical connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
4.3 Troubleshooting Midi Operator Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
4.3.1 Troubleshooting checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
4.3.2 How to replace Midi Operator Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
6.8 Troubleshooting Local Operator Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
6.8.1 Troubleshooting flow diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
6.8.2 How to replace Local Operator Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
6.8.3 How to recommision a Local Operator Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
6.9 Troubleshooting the Watch Calling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
6.9.1 Troubleshooting flow diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
6.9.2 How to replace Watch Calling units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
6.10 Troubleshooting Distributed Processing Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
6.10.1 How to handle Distributed Processing Units error codes . . . . . . . . . . . 262
6.10.2 How to handle Distributed Processing Units communication errors . . 263
6.10.3 How to start or stop Remote Operator Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
6.10.4 How to configure a new DPU channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
6.10.5 How to replace Distributed Processing Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
7 REPLACEABLE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
7.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
7.2 How to get in touch with us . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 XVII

7.3 Consumable spare Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

7.4 Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
7.5 Plugs and accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
7.6 Other spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
7.7 Configuration settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
7.8 Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
5 APPENDIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
5.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
5.2 Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
5.2.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
5.2.2 Alarm list abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
5.3 References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
XVIII AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Functional description
1 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
1.1 Introduction
This chapter introduces the DataChief C20 Alarm and
monitoring system with process control and power management.
The following subjects are covered:
- Overview
- Design principles
- System components
- Software components
- Technical specifications
1.1.1 Software version

This manual complies with DataChief C20 software version DC
60052.07.04.
Figure 2 Typical engine control room fitted with

DataChief  C20.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 1

1.2 Overview
The DataChief C20 is an Alarm and monitoring system with
process control and power management. Modular design allows
flexibility in configuring the system to individual requirements,
covering the whole range from low complexity alarm systems to
highly integrated alarm and monitoring systems with advanced
process control. Sub-systems can include all or any combination
of the following:
• Alarm and monitoring system.
• Auxiliary control system.
• Power management system.
• Propulsion control.
• Ballast automation system.
• HVAC (air conditioning).
• Management support.
• Reefer monitoring
• Fire system
Note This document describes the DataChief  C20 Alarm and

monitoring system with process control and power management.
The system is based on Kongsberg Maritime Ship Systems unified

automation concept, where each individual ship configuration is
built up using standard modules communicating on CAN- and
local area networks. DataChief C20 is configurable for all ship
types, including oil and gas tankers, bulk carriers, passenger
vessels, container and Ro-Ro vessels, reefers and other special
purpose vessels.
The main purpose of the system is to give ship’s officers all the
basic alarms and status information they require in order to
maintain safe and efficient operation of the machinery and other
relevant equipment.
DataChief C20 complies with the requirements of IMO, local
maritime authorities, IACS, and eleven classification societies. It
is designed to meet the classification societies requirements for
periodically unmanned engine room operation. The system
conforms to all rules and regulations, and all modules are type
approved. The system incorporates the latest advances in hardware
and software technology. DataChief C20 is developed to strict
military QA standards.
2 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

1.3 Design principles
1.3.1 General
Alarm groups
All alarms and monitored values are divided into alarm groups.
Any alarm can only be part of one group. Each alarm group has a
dedicated button on the operator control panel. If only standard
personal computer keyboard is provided the operator control panel
is displayed on the colour graphics display and works in the same
way as the physical panel. Active alarms are indicated by a flashing
light (unacknowledged alarm) or steady light (acknowledged
alarm).
Alarm types
Alarm detection for analogue signals
The following functions are included:
• Instrument failure alarms.
• Low-low process alarms with or without action (slow-down).
• Low process alarms.
• High process alarms.
• High-high process alarms with or without action (slow-down).
• Return to normal detection with dead-band to avoid alarm
fluctuations.
• Adjustable filter factors to filter fluctuations in the incoming
signals.
• Time delay of alarm triggering and return to normal messages.
Alarm detection for on/off (two state) signals
• High process alarms (open or closed).
• Return to normal detection.
Alarm detection for on/off signals with line check
• High process alarms (open or closed).
• Line broken alarm.
• Line short alarm.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 3

• Return to normal detection.

Inhibit alarm
Some alarms are conditional and will be inhibited when a specified
condition is present. This function is accomplished by defining a
signal as an inhibit source for a specified alarm or a specified group
of alarms. An adjustable time delay is available to extend the
inhibit situation for each signal.
Alarm indication
The four last alarms detected by the system will be indicated in the
lower right corner of the colour graphics display. The alarm tag,
description and state will be displayed. The following states are
used by the system.
• On/off signal open contact alarm: OPEN
• On/off signal closed contact alarm: CLOSED
• On/off signal broken alarm: BROKEN
• On/off signal short alarm: SHORT
• Analogue signal instrument failure, signal value outside low
range: IFL (Instrument Failure Low)
• Analogue signal instrument failure, signal value outside
high range: IFH (Instrument Failure High)
• Analogue signal high alarm: HIGH
• Analogue signal low alarm: LOW
• Analogue signal high-high alarm: HI-HI
• Analogue signal low-low alarm: LO-LO
• On/off or analogue sensor taken out of scanning: OFFSC
• On/off or analogue signal return from alarm: RETURN
To visually distinguish between the alarm states different colours
have been used. The meaning of the different colours are listed
below:
• Normal state: GREEN
• Alarm state, not acknowledged: RED with asterisk (*)
• State changed from not acknowledged to normal: RED
• Alarm state, acknowledged: YELLOW
• Alarm state, inhibited: BLUE
• Not updated or invalid values: GREY
4 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Alarm and monitoring displays

There are several display pages for presenting alarms and
monitored values. The alarm pages comprise:
• Alarm group display page (activated from group alarm
push-buttons).
• Alarm summary page, containing a list of all active alarms.
• Alarm history page, containing a consecutive list of
time-stamped alarms.
The monitoring pages include:
• Group display containing a list of all measuring points within
an alarm group.
• Selected points display (and logging facility).
• Tag details, giving detailed information about each measuring
point in the system.
1.3.2 Building blocks

The DataChief C20 is a modular system that allows us to meet
individual ship owners requirements using standard modules. The
main building blocks of the DataChief C20 are:
• Distributed Processing Units: Their main functions are to
monitor analogue or digital sensors and to provide analogue and
digital output to different devices. A number of different
Distributed Processing Units are available to meet specific
control and monitoring applications.
• Remote Operator Stations: Their main functions are to
receive alarms and to allow monitoring and control of the
system. They can display mimic diagrams, allow control of the
Watch Calling System and printing of various logs. They also
enable the operator access to Distributed Processing Units for
inspection of variables, local operation of equipment
adjustment of parameters etc.
• Local Operator Stations: Their main functions are to enable
the operator local access to Distributed Processing Units for
inspection of variables, local operation of equipment
adjustment of parameters etc.
• Watch Bridge Units: Their main functions are to indicate
engine room alarms on the bridge while in bridge control and
to accept the transfer of machine watch responsibility to and
from the bridge.
• Watch Cabin Units: Their main functions are to indicate
engine room alarms in the engineer on duty’s cabin and in the
public quarters while in bridge control.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 5

• Dual redundant Local Area Network: Used for

communication between the Remote Operator Stations and
other PC based equipment. Each unit is connected to two
completely separate Local Area Networks (LAN) for
maximum redundancy.
• Dual redundant CAN-bus: Used for communication between
the Distributed Processing Units. Each unit is connected to two
completely separate CAN-buses (CAN - Control Area
Network) for maximum redundancy.
• Dual Process Segment Controller: The dPSC is a dual two
channel CAN gateway. In most cases the two channels are
working in parallel on redundant CAN lines. The main
functions are to process messages from the a local CAN-bus
segment and send them on the global process bus, where they
are available for other dPSC’s and System Gateways.
• Process Segment Starcoupler: Used to segment the CAN-bus
so that a short circuit or broken line in one segment will not
affect the functions in the other segments.
• System Gateway: Connects two CAN lines to two Local Area
Network lines. The main purpose is to receive messages from
the two process buses running CAN, and update the Remote
Operator Station database.
Different selections of these units are used to configure each
individual system. DataChief C20 is a fully
microprocessor-based system. It is decentralised for safety and
ease of installation but operation is centralised using Remote
Operator Stations (ROS). Each or a group of Distributed
Processing Units can be connected to a Local Operator Station
(LOS) containing display and keyboard for back-up/local
operation.
1.3.3 Decentralised system architecture

The heart of the system is a small family of different intelligent I/O
units called Distributed Processing Units. These communicate
with each other on a redundant high capacity process-bus. All
monitoring and automation functions are carried out by the
Distributed Processing Units, while the centralised Remote
Operator Stations provide the Human Machine Interface.
Each Distributed Processing Unit type has a specific capacity in
number and type of analogue or digital input and output channels.
The number of channels varies from 8 to 32.
6 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

To configure the tasks for a specific Distributed Processing Unit

the appropriate software and parameters are downloaded into the
unit. This allows some Distributed Processing Units to perform
alarm functions, some control functions, some safety, or any
combination of these. This makes it easy to separate automation
system functions.
The process-bus used for communication between the Distributed
Processing Units in the DataChief C20 is the Controller Area
Network (CAN) bus. The CAN-bus has a very high reliability. For
systems with a high number of Distributed Processing Units or for
other design reasons, System Gateways (SGW) may be added to
the CAN network. These units provide the necessary segregation
of the automation system between for instance the different
sections of an alarm and monitoring system. The System Gateways
do not lower system performance or limit the possibilities for
locating operator stations.
The DataChief C20 is designed to accept both a “grounded” or
a “floating” earth installation. The latter installation method is
required by SOLAS Regulation 45 for some vessels types.
Floating earth allows coexistence with other systems, and ground
leakage detection.
ACCOMODATION WHEELHOUSE ENGINE CONTROL ROOM
Fleetmaster ROS ROS ROS ROS ROS ROS
300 KW
21” WBU
BUZZER
WCU
WCU
PRINTER PRINTER PRINTER
HUB
WCU
DUAL LAN
HUB
WCU
VA VA VA
C C C
24 V
WCU
M GE M GE M GE
1 - nn
DPU UPS 220 VAC UPS 220 VAC UPS 220 VAC UPS 24 VDC
1-- nn
INSTR.DRIV.
DUAL CAN DPU
START INSTR.DRIV.
DUAL CAN
DPU
PROCESS AREA
ROT. LIGHT/
KLAXON dPSC
Gateway
RESET
RESET
LOS LOS LOS LOS LOS LOS
DPU dPSC dPSC DPU dPSC dPSC
DPU DPU DPU DPU
DPU DPU
RESET DPU DPU DPU DPU
DPU DPU DPU DPU
DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU
DPU DPU DPU
DPU DPU DPU DPU
RESET DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU
DPU DPU DPU
DPU DPU DPU DPU
DPU DPU DPU DPU
DPU DPU DPU DPU
DPU DPU DPU DPU
DPU DPU DPU DPU
DPU DPU DPU DPU
DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU
DPU DPU DPU
DPU DPU DPU DPU
RESET
DPU DPU DPU DPU
DPU DPU DPU DPU
DPU DPU DPU DPU
DPU DPU W/dPSC DPU DPU
1 x 8 DPU CABINET 18 x 8 DPU CABINET W/dPSC 1 x 8 DPU CABINET 1 x 8 DPU CABINET 1 x 16 DPU CABINET
2 x 16 DPU CABINET
BUZZER W/dPSC W/dPSC
7 x 16 DPU CABINET 8 x 16 DPU CABINET
Figure 3 Typical configuration drawing for a passenger vessel.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 7

The Distributed Processing Units have been designed for

immunity against single failures. Each Distributed Processing Unit
has an internal three way galvanic isolation between power,
communication and input/output channels. If a unit fails this will
not affect the power source, communication bus or damage the
sensors. The Built In System Test will detect the error and warn the
operator. Failures to the process-bus, cabling or connected sensors
will also be detected by the Built In System Test.
Exchange of a faulty Distributed Processing Unit can be done
without turning the power off the DataChief C20. The procedure
is simply to disconnect and remove the faulty unit and then mount
and connect a replacement. The operator then requests the system
to replace the module, software is automatically downloaded and
the Distributed Processing Unit starts operating.
All Distributed Processing Unit types have been qualified
according to the latest revision of the IACS E10 test procedure,
satisfying the requirements for placement in the most demanding
locations. All Distributed Processing Units can be mounted
directly on diesel engines or similar locations without shock
absorbers. Only Ingress Protection (IP) may be needed. The
Distributed Processing Units are CE marked as required for some
European Union flagstate vessels. They also meet the
requirements to use the “Wheel Mark” defined by the European
Union Maritime Directive (EMD), satisfying all the new
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) requirements.
1.3.4 Centralised operation

DataChief C20 is operated through a number of Remote Operator
Stations. These are normally located in the Engine Control Room.
Additional stations may be located in the wheelhouse, cargo
control room, damage control room, ship’s office or other parts of
the vessel. The Remote Operator Stations are normally connected
to the Distributed Processing Units trough a Dual Redundant
Control Area Network.
The Remote Operator Stations are fitted with colour graphic
displays and are operated either using a standard PC keyboard and
mouse or through a purpose built Operator Control Panel.
The Remote Operator Stations provides the operator with a
number of standard display pictures containing information about
the engine and surrounding equipment. Control of any of the
Distributed Processing Units can be performed from the Remote
Operator Stations. Full monitoring and alarm facilities are
provided in both machinery space and Engine Control Room.
8 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Advanced facilities can also be provided for unmanned machinery

space, and the watch-calling system allows automatic calling of
duty engineers. This allows both machinery space and engine
control room to be safely left unmanned, while the machinery
watch is carried out from the bridge.
All Remote Operator Stations are Windows based personal
computers; type approved for maritime use. They work in parallel;
none of them acts as master. All are interconnected via dual
redundant local area network. Although every Remote Operator
Station is identical, access to vital functions may be configured
differently. The control availability is defined by extensive use of
software password access. Some Remote Operator Stations such
as units located in the ship office are normally used for monitoring
only. These units will not allow acknowledgement of alarms or
execution of control commands. All general information such as
monitoring of alarms, trends and graphics are available for
inspection.
Changing a limit or parameter on one Remote Operator Station
will automatically update all other stations. All operator actions
such as the starting or stopping of a pump or the changing of an
alarm limit are logged and time tagged (optional).
When ever a variable or state changes significantly the Distributed
Processing Units updates the database in each of the Remote
Operator Stations. This means that data displayed at any Remote
Operator Station is always up-to-date. There is no need to request
data each time the operator wishes to inspect a variable. As a result
of this, the data traffic on the process bus and the Local Area
Network is kept to a minimum, giving extremely fast data access.
The Remote Operator Station serves as the database host for
process data, engineering data and software. Software for Remote
Operator Stations and the different Distributed Processing Units
are stored here. They include functions for automatic down
loading of parameters to the Distributed Processing Units at
commissioning time or when a Distributed Processing Unit is
replaced.
Configuration control of DataChief C20 systems is taken care of
by an automatic version update at any change of the engineering
database or the application software. The system logs all changes
made. Version numbers and additional information can at any time
be individually inspected for each DataChief C20, as required by
the major classification societies. Our commissioning editor
“Tools” is used to configure or modify the functionality of the
DataChief C20 and is used to generate ”as built documentation”.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 9

The local area network included as part of DataChief C20 can

interface with personal computers for remote monitoring and even
with other external computer systems. The following drawings
gives a configuration example:
ACCOMODATION CHIEF ENGINEER ROOM WHEELHOUSE ENGINE CONTROL ROOM
Fleetm aster
ROS
300 KW
21” WBU
LOS
BUZZER
WCU
WCU 16 group
PRINTER
WCU 16 group
WCU 16 group
WCU 16 group
WCU 16 group
1 - nn 1-- nn VA
C
24 V 24 V
WCU 16 group DPU DPU
INSTR.DRIV. INSTR.DRIV.
MGE
WCU 16 group
WCU 16 group UPS 220 VAC UPS 24 VDC UPS 24 VDC
DUAL CAN
START
DPU
PROCESS AREA
ROT. LIGHT/
KLAXON
DPU DPU DPU DPU
DPU DPU DPU DPU
RESET
N x 3 DPU CABINET N x 3 DPU CABINET N x 3 DPU CABINET DPU
N x 4 DPU CABINET
RESET
RESET
BUZZER
Figure 4 Configuration drawing for an oil tanker.
10 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

1.4 System components

The following pages contains a description of each of the main
system components of the DataChief C20 Alarm and monitoring
system with process control and power management.
The following system components are described:
- Remote operator station
- Local Operator Stations
- Watch Bridge Unit
- Watch Cabin Unit
- Distributed Processing Units
- Gateways
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 11

1.4.1 Remote Operator Station
Figure 5 Remote Operator Station (ROS)
The Remote Operator Station is a type approved personal

computer, connected to a colour graphics display and a printer.
Operator input is either done through a standard personal computer
keyboard or through our custom made Operator Control Panel.
The Operator Control Panel is a specially designed keyboard that
provides easy access to the different operator functions. It is
divided into separate function areas. Buttons are combined with
lamps to indicate alarms, status of the Extended Alarm System and
to indicate main system functions. The Operator Control Panel is
in many cases connected to an external ”sound off” button.
The Remote Operator Station can be supplied with a printer (for
on demand printing), an alarm printer, log printer or colour hard
copy unit. When a Distributed Process Unit detects an alarm
condition, the alarm is identified by a flashing indicator on the
Operator Control Panel. The alarm is also displayed on the colour
graphics display, a buzzer is turned on and the Alarm Printer
automatically prints the alarm. By pressing the button associated
with the flashing indicator more detailed alarm information is
displayed on the colour graphics display.
12 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Detailed sensor information for any Distributed Process Unit, such

as alarm or normal status data, can also be shown on the colour
graphics display, or printed on demand. Analogue sensor data can
be presented as a bargraph or a trend curve. Selected sensor data
may be printed automatically at fixed intervals. The system can
display the latest alarms for each alarm group individually or all
active alarms.
The logging printer and the colour graphics display records all
status changes, such as alarm acknowledgements and alarm
condition cleared. When all alarm conditions are cleared, the
system returns to normal.
Alarm limits and delays are adjustable from the Operator Control
Panel. A counter function keeps track of running hours for engines,
pumps and related items. This function can also accumulate flow.
Counter values are shown on the colour graphics display or may
be printed.
The Remote Operator Station is used when transferring machinery
watch responsibility between bridge and engine control room.
Selecting the engineer for watch-call duty is carried out from here,
and all available engineers, whether on duty or not, may be called
to the engine control room in the case of an emergency.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 13

1.4.2 Midi operator station
Figure 6 Midi Operator Station (MOS).
The Midi Operator Station is a multipurpose operator station

designed to be placed anywhere on the ship, even out on deck. It
allows alarm indication, process control and power management.
Operation is performed through a set of function keys and a high
resolution colour graphical display. For small alarm systems it can
be the only operator station. The Midi Operator Station contains
a symbol library for presentation of process control equipment and
use these to display mimic diagrams. The Midi Operator Station
gives the operator the possibility to:
• Monitor the status of any object, from a single input signal to
a controllable object.
• Be informed of any process- or system alarm, through visual
and audible signals.
• Interface to a printer for alarm loging purposes.
• Control the process through built-in pushbuttons and graphical
feedback.
• Reconfigure the distributed database located in the Distributed
Processing Units, through numeric and alphanumeric inputs.
14 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

1.4.3 Local operator station
Figure 7 Local Operator Station (LOS).
The Local Operator Station is an optional operator control panel.

It includes a four line by 40 characters Liquid Crystal Display
(LCD display) and push-buttons for operator interaction. It is used
to allow local access to the Distributed Processing Units for
inspection of process variables, local operation of equipment,
simulation of input/output signals, adjustment of parameters and
inspection of the built-in diagnostics.
All Distributed Processing Units connected to the same CAN-bus
as the Local Operator Station are accessible. As soon as connection
is established, the Local Operator Station is able to control the
selected Distributed Processing Unit. The dialogues are defined by
the functionality of each individual type of Distributed Processing
Unit.
If a Distributed Processing Unit is isolated from the rest of the
system because of a communication break-down, or because the
Remote Operator Station has developed a serious fault, all the
necessary alarm and monitoring functions can as an option be
available locally. Detailed information on the type of alarm and its
source is then available at the Local Operator Station.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 15

1.4.4 Watch Bridge Unit
Figure 8 Watch Bridge Unit (WBU), LCD type.

Two different types of Watch Bridge Units exist, an LED and a
LCD type. Both are used to indicate and accept the transfer of
machine watch responsibility between bridge and engine control
room. The LED type has more alarm indicators and the LCD type
has a display to show alarms in clear text.
Figure 9 Watch Bridge Unit (WBU), LED type.
16 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

When the bridge has the machinery watch responsibility, one or

more engineers must be on call. A general alarm signal will call
them to the engine control room if an alarm condition arises. The
alarm indication on the Watch Bridge Unit is that a buzzer sounds
and a single or group alarm lamp is flashing. When an alarm is
acknowledged in the engine control room, or the situation is
cleared, appropriate indications are given on the Watch Bridge
Unit.
The DataChief C20 prevents the bridge from assuming watch
responsibility if no engineers are assigned to on call duty. The
bridge personnel may call the engineers on-duty in their quarters
at any time, for consultation etc. Acknowledgement of such calls
are provided.
Alarm indication can be provided when the bridge is not having the
machinery watch. Indicators show when an alarm has been
acknowledged in the engine control room but the buzzer is not
sounded.
1.4.5 Watch Cabin Unit
Figure 10 Watch Cabin Unit (WBU), LCD type.

Two different types of Watch Cabin Units exist, an LED and a
LCD version. Both are used to indicate engine room alarms. They
are placed in the engineers cabins and in public areas. The LED
type has more alarm indicators and the LCD type has a display to
show alarms in clear text.
To set the machinery watch responsibility system to bridge mode
one or more engineers must be on call. When an alarm condition
arise a general alarm signal is sounded in the duty engineers cabins
and in the public areas. The visual alarm indication on the Watch
Cabin Unit consists of single or group alarm lamps.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 17

Figure 11 Watch Cabin Unit (WCU), LED type.

When the bridge has the machinery watch responsibility, one or
more engineers must be on call. When an alarm situation occur the
alarm signal will be given, both in the duty-engineers cabin and in
the public areas. The visual alarm indication on the Watch Cabin
Units are that a buzzer sounds and a single or group alarm lamp is
flashing. The engineer will then normally go to the engine control
room to find the cause of the alarm. When the alarm is
acknowledged in the engine control room, or the situation is
cleared, the alarm condition is cleared from the Watch Cabin Units.
If the engineer does not acknowledge within a specified period of
time, the alarm signal is repeated in the engineers’ quarters, and on
the bridge, until it is acknowledged. The system can also be used
to call an engineer to the bridge or the engine control room without
an alarm condition. Alarm indication without sounding the buzzer
is configurable when the Watch Calling System is in off-duty
mode.
18 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

1.4.6 ShipViewer
ShipViewer is a software package that runs on a standard personal
computer connected to the DataChief C20 local area network.
The computer can be installed anywhere on the ship. It has similar
viewing capabilities as those found in the Remote Operator
Station, but no control functions. The following systems can be
monitored through ShipViewer dependent on the system
configuration:
• Engine monitoring and control system
• Power management system
• Fire system
• Tank system
The system presents online data, mimic diagrams, logged data and
allows convenient printing facilities. It is a useful tool to avoid
misunderstanding and lack of information.
Functions
• Presentation of logged ship data and mimic diagrams.
• Presentation of alarms.
• Presentation of alarm history.
• Status on open/closed valves, running/stopped equipment etc.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 19

1.4.7 Distributed Processing Units

General
A number of different Distributed Processing Units are available
for different tasks. The main functions of the Distributed
Processing Units are to monitor analogue or digital sensors and to
provide analogue and digital output to different devices. All units
have the same mechanical construction and are built using the
same electronic design principles. The main characteristics of the
Distributed Processing Units are:
Figure 12 Distributed Processing Units (DPU)

• LED indicators on the housing for Watch-dog, Run, General
information, unit initialised and power polarity.
• Three-way isolation between:
- I/O and power.
- I/O and process-bus.
- Power and process-bus.
• Single printed circuit board design.
• Easy service replacement without setting trimmers, dip
switches, jumpers or sockets.
• No additional EMC protection required (only IP).
• Time synchronisation.
• Non-volatile memory.
• Remote alarms function.
• Dual CAN-bus interfaces.
• Software can be downloaded into the unit.
20 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

• Built In Self-Test (BIST) monitoring temperature, power and

sensor excitation overload.
• All parameters are stored in each unit.
• Each unit is remotely configurable.
• No serviceable parts inside.
• All connections are plugable.
Each Distributed Process Unit contains its own microprocessor.
These are programmed for a number of different tasks such as
detecting when a monitored signal move outside set limits.
Unwanted alarms are inhibited during start-up and shut-down of
the machinery. Status information is continuously monitored by
the DataChief C20’s Remote Operator Stations through the
system network.
When an unacceptable condition is detected, the Distributed
Process Unit and DataChief C20 generates an alarm signal,
identifies the responsible sensor, and provides information about
the condition. The following gives a short description of each
Distributed Processing Unit type:
Remote Analogue Input (RAi-16)

This unit has 16 analogue input channels. Each channel is
selectable as voltage, current and resistance input in different
ranges and has free technical units scaling. It also incorporates a
5-500Hz counter channel. The main features are:
• 16 analog or digital input channels.
• Scaled in technical units.
• 1 Counter 5 - 500 Hz.
• Limit check.
• Alarm and monitoring for all channels.
• Trend.
• Time stamp of alarms and events (0.001 seconds).
• Self checking.
• Sensor excitation power overload.
• CAN net status, error handling.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 21

Remote Analogue Input (RAi-10tc)

This unit has 10 analogue input channels. It is used for temperature
measurements with Thermo Coupler (TC) elements of different
type. It is particularly suited to monitor engine exhaust
temperatures. A large variety of temperature elements can be
connected, with ranges ± 50, ± 200, 0 to + 600_C. A Cold Junction
Compensation function is included. If external compensation is
needed, the use of external Thermo Coupler amplifiers and RAi-16
is recommended. The main features are:
• 10 thermo-coupler input channels.
• Scaled in technical units.
• Limit check.
• Trend.
• Time stamp of alarms and events.
• Self checking.
Remote Digital Input (RDi-32 and RDi-32a)

These units have 32 digital input channels/dry contacts and
includes LED status indicators. The main features are:
• 32 digital input channels with LED status indicators.
• Input dry contacts.
• Trend.
• Self checking.
Remote Analogue Output (RAo-8)

This unit has 8 analogue output channels. Each channel is
selectable for voltage or current output in different ranges and
almost free technical units scaling. This module is suited to drive
analogue indicators. By placing the module close to instruments
long cables can be avoided. The main features are:
• 8 analog output channels.
22 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

• ± 10VDC / ±20 mA.

Remote Digital Output (RDo-16)

This unit has 16 digital output channels and includes LED status
indicators. The maximum output current for each channel is 3
Amperes (resistive load). Maximum voltage is 230 VAC. The main
features are:· 16 digital output channels with LED status indicator.
The main features are:
• Change over, brake before make relay-contacts.
• Pulse on output.
• Pulse off output.
Remote Input/Output (RIO-C1)

The RIO-C1 is a highly flexible input/output Distributed
Processing Unit. It is particularly suited for electric generator
control, main engine or auxiliary engine safety systems.
The unit is equipped with four input channels, which can be
individually configured to handle both analogue and digital
signals. Each channel has an electronic fuse to protect the
electronics against damage.
The unit can connect to single-phase AC voltage and a current
signal. Based on these signals the following values can be
measured and calculated:
• AC voltage available from generator and busbar.
• AC current supplied from the generator.
• AC frequency of generator and busbar.
• Phase angle between AC voltages, for synchronising circuit
breakers.
• Phase angle between AC voltage and current, for calculating
reactive load, kVAr.
• Active load calculation based on AC voltage, current and phase
angle.
The unit can be connected to dual pick-ups, measuring rotating
speed of any machinery, in the speed range of 0 – 1500 Hz. The two
analogue output channels can drive any indicator by either voltage
or current.
The unit can further control six digital output channels (2-pole
relay (normal open/normal closed) or solenoid valve driver with
built-in loop fail detection facilities.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 23

Number of Function Level

channels
6 Digital output Solenoid valve driver or relay,
max 3 A resistive load
2 Analogue output mA
2 Analogue input. Max. 30Vrms, 50/60 Hz
ACV (1--phase)
1 Analogue input. Max. 1A, 50/60 Hz
AC current
4 Analogue/digital As RAi--16
input, flexible
2 Input from pick- 24VDC (counter input)
up
4 Digital input As RDI-32
Table 1 RIO-C1 Process connections.

The main features are:
• 21 analog or digital, input and output channels with LED status
indicator.
• Trend.
• Self checking.
Remote Input/Output (RIO-C2)

The RIO-C2 is a combination module for digital inputs and
outputs. The unit is equipped with eight digital input channels
which are galvanically isolated between the sensor signals. The
digital input sensor can be either a potential free contact (switch)
or an external 24VDC or 24VAC signal. Each channel has an
electronic fuse to protect the electronics against damage. When the
faulty sensor interface has returned to normal, the electronic fuse
is automatically reset. The unit can control eight digital output
channels, 2-pole relays (normal open/normal closed). It is
particularly suited for control of pumps and valves. The main
features are:
• 8 input and 8 output channels with LED status indicator.
- 8 channels relays change over, brake before make.
- 8 channels digital inputs, with possibility for 24VDC live
input or dry contacts.
24 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003


• Trend.
• Self checking.
CAN net status, error handling.
Process Segment Starcoupler

The CAN line is vulnerable against short circuit and unterminated
lines. A short-circuit or a broken line will disable the entire CAN
segment. The Process Segment Starcoupler protects two sections
of a CAN segment from each other.
Each terminal on the Process Segment Starcoupler is based on the
ISO 11898 standard, with optical isolation. The Process Segment
Starcoupler also protects the terminals against dominant bits that
are not part of a CAN message. Thus short-circuit or malfunction
on one CAN terminal does not affect the other CAN terminals.
The maximum length of one CAN segment at 125kBaud is 530m.
A segment going through a Process Star Coupler is limited to
515m. This length is the maximum line length between any two
nodes in the CAN segment. For that reason it is advised to use the
Process Segment Starcoupler to split two sections of a process
segment, where the segment is running through rough
environment or fire zones.
Voltage converter controller (VCC)

The VCC-440 module is designed for use in main switchboards.
The module secures the installation of the power management and
generator protection system, by transforming the higher voltages
to low and safe levels. The VCC-440 module is equipped with six
voltage transformers to transform from 440 to 24 VAC. The
module handles three major tasks:
• Supply the C3 generator protection module with AC voltage
from the measured three phase generator bus bars, L1-L2,
L1-L3 and L2-L3, derated from 440 to 24 VAC.
• Supply the C3 generator protection module with 24VDC power
(1A), using the generator busbar (L2-L3) as source.
• Supply the C4 power management module with a single phase
AC voltage from the generator busbar L1-L2 and the
switchboard busbar L1-L2, derated from 440 to 24 VAC.
As an option, the VCC module can be equipped with transformers
for 690 VAC.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 25

Generator monitoring and control (C4)

The C4 module is designed for control of marine generators and
bustie breakers. The in- and outputs are designed for interfacing to
voltage and current transformers, as well as switchboard
equipment.
• Synchronize and connect of generator CB.
• Synchronize and connect of bustie CB.
• Start and stop of auxiliary diesel engine.
• RPM set point control of auxiliary diesel engine.
• Optional control of primer pump for AE.
• Optional control of fuel selection for AE.
• Calculation of generator load (kW, kVAr).
• Driving MSB instruments (kW, kVAr).
• Load sharing between generators.
• AVR set point control (optional).
Generator protection (C3)
The C3 module is designed for protection of marine generators.
The in- and outputs are designed for interfacing to voltage and
current transformers as well as switchboard equipment. The
module has a 7-segment display trip indicator, to be independent
of external indicators. The C3 module is available in two versions:
• C3-GP: Generator Protection
• C3-GDCP: Generator & differential current protection
The module has a dual 24VDC power connection, to uniterruptible
power supply and generator voltage.
• Short circuit tripping of generator CB.
• Over current tripping of generator CB.
• Reverse power tripping of generator CB.
• Optional differential current protection.
• Local indication of reason for trip.
• Local reset of tripping.
• Calculation of generator load (kW, kVAr).
• Calculation of phase angel between voltage and current (cosine
ϕ).
1.4.8 Gateways
General
Two types of gateways are available.
26 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

• The System Gateway: Used as a redundant gateway between

CAN-bus and Local Area Network.
• The dual Processing System Controller: Used as a redundant
gateway between two CAN segments (sections of the
CAN-bus).
The main purposes of both units are to provide galvanic isolation
between different parts of the network and to segregate process bus
traffic in large systems. Messages are then converted between the
network parts, while maintaining redundancy.
Both units provide a service to protect all nodes (Distributed
Processing Units, Watch Bridge Unit, Watch Cabin Units and
Local Operator panels) connected to the CAN-bus. If the
communication with one node fails, the gateways will generate a
system failure message identifying the node and the failure. The
Dual Process System Controller may also be equipped with
supervisory control logic for particularly demanding tasks.
The System Gateway – SGW

The System Gateway is a four channel CAN-bus to dual Local
Area Network gateway. Its main task is to receive messages from
the two CAN-buses, and update the Remote Operator Stations.
Handling of operator commands and downloading of parameters
and software from the Remote Operator Stations to the nodes
(Distributed Processing Units and Local Operator Stations) are
handled as well.
The System Gateway will route global CAN-bus messages
between the four CAN-buses. Global messages are data messages
needed in more than one bus segment, typically messages for
inhibiting or blocking alarms during start-up or shut-down.
The System Gateway functions as an intelligent message converter
sending and receiving data between any of its CAN channels and
units having Process Data Segment located on the Local Area
Network. The converter function will pre-process CAN messages
and load them into a local database for distribution. The other way
the converter will convert messages from Process Data Segment
and route them to the relevant node (Distributed Processing Units,
or Local Operator panels).
All necessary configuration and software installation is done
through the Local Area Network. The Simple Network
Management Protocol is implemented to gain access via the Local
Area Network to System Gateway and CAN diagnostic databases.
Galvanic isolation is provided between the 24V power input and
the System Gateway interfaces.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 27

Dual Process Segment Controller (dPSC)

The dual Process Segment Controller is a dual two channel CAN
gateway. It consist of two processors, each with two CAN
interfaces. The two processors have separate power connections,
and they share information via dual port memory.
In this way the two processors are able to run in parallel and
provide redundancy both for CAN-bus communication and for
logic functions. The main function is to process messages from the
local CAN-bus segment and send them on the global CAN bus,
where they are available for other dual Process Segment
Controllers and System Gateways. It handles operator commands
and downloading of parameters and software from any System
Gateway or Remote Operator Station to the Distributed Processing
Units connected to the local CAN-bus.
When the dual Process Segment Controller is controlling a set of
Distributed Processing Units, both processors are working in
parallel running the same process algorithm. In this function the
dual Process Segment Controller operate as a running back-up.
The dual Process Segment Controller is equipped with a dual serial
interface (RS422/485), primarily designated to communicate with
other manufacturers equipment. Galvanic isolation is provided
between the power connections and the CAN-bus, and between the
two CAN-buses. The main features are:
• Dual two channel CAN gateway with separate and galvanic
isolated processors.
• Possible to power the two processors from separate power
supplies.
• High speed data-link between the two processors.
• A node with CANopen master capability on all four CAN
channels.
• Redundant routing of messages between local and global CAN
segments.
• Dual serial interface, galvanic isolated, RS422/485 to
communicate with other vendors equipment.
• Various redundant application process control logic. When the
two processors in the dual Process Segment Controller is
controlling the same Distributed Processing Units they are
working in parallel running the same process algorithm.
28 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

1.5 Software components
1.5.1 Humane Machine Interface

Operator control panel
The Operator Control Panel is either available as a dedicated panel
or displayed and operated from the colour graphics display using
a standard PC keyboard and mouse. The Operator Control Panel
include the following main functions:
• Alarm display selection and acknowledgement.
• Selection and set-up of information to be monitored.
• Set-up and activation of logging (printing).
• Parameter adjustment.
• Extended Alarm and watch-calling functions.
When only monitoring facilities are required the panels control
functions can be inhibited.
Figure 13 Remote Operator Stations.
Alarm and monitoring display

A number of display windows are available for presenting alarms
and monitored values. Alarm windows include:
• Alarm group display (activated by the group alarm
push-buttons).
• Alarm summary, containing a list of all active alarms messages.
• Alarm history, containing a continuous list of time-stamped
alarm messages.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 29

Monitoring windows include:

• Group display containing a list of all measuring points within
an alarm group.
• Information display for a selected point.
• Tag details giving detailed information about each measuring
point in the system.
Process mimics, bargraphs & status displays
The system can include (as an option) a number of standard display
pictures for common information from the engine and surrounding
equipment. The standard mimic windows are:
• Exhaust gas temperatures and average temperature bar graph.
• Bar graphs.
• Trend curves.
In addition, customised mimic diagrams will be designed for each
project according to the piping diagrams. These display windows
show the status of the equipment (open/closed, running/stopped,
% filling etc.) and are interactive, allowing operation of the
equipment.
Logging/hard copy
All logs can be printed on request. The autolog and the selected
points log can also be configured to print at specified intervals. The
following logging function are available:
• Alarm log (time stamped alarm and return to normal).
• Selected points log.
• Complete log.
• Group log.
• Inhibited points log.
• Autolog.
All alarms are printed in red. A separate deskjet printer can be
fitted to print mimic display windows as an option.
Self-checking and diagnostics
The Distributed Processing Unit’s have an on-line Built In
Self-Test (BIST) system, that monitors the units temperature,
power, and sensor excitation.
Testing of the Remote Operator Stations and their ability to give
alarms according to the requirements, is initiated by pushing the
“alarm test” push-button on the Operator Control Panel. In
addition, the electronics is automatically tested when power is
turned on.
30 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Access control
In order to limit or enable control of the process from any Remote
Operator Station an advanced passwords system is available .
Changes of limits or parameters are also guarded through the use
of passwords. All operator actions can be logged with time tags
(optional).
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 31

1.5.2 System functions

Alarm block
Some of the alarms are conditional and will be blocked when a
specified condition is present. For instance when the main engine
is stopped the lubrication oil pressure falls and should normally
have triggered an alarm condition. Since this is quite normal the
alarm is blocked. This function is started by defining a signal as an
inhibit signal for a specified alarm or a specified group of alarms.
An adjustable time delay for each signal is available to extend the
blocking situation.
Alarm acknowledge
It is possible to acknowledge alarms while a mimic window, alarm
group or alarm summary is displayed. Alarm acknowledgement
for separate or group alarms displayed on the screen is done
through a single push of the same pushbutton.
Engine exhaust gas temperature monitoring

The DataChief C20 exhaust gas monitoring system calculates the
deviation between the individual cylinders and the average value
of all cylinders. An alarm is given if the deviation exceeds the
acceptable limit. Alarm limits are continuously calculated based
on the engine load. The deadband is set narrower as the engine load
increases. Individual variations due to different exhaust piping and
sensor locations for each cylinder are taken into account.
Individual calculations for each cylinder bank are when relevant
made. The maximum number of cylinder for each engine or
cylinder bank is 12. As the average temperature is used as reference
for the deviations, it is necessary to correct the temperature of each
cylinder, to get the same temperature in all cylinders as reference.
This correction is done when running the engine at full load. When
the average temperature is below a preset value, the deviation
alarm is blocked.
Trend monitor
The DataChief C20 automatically records selected
measurements, and store them for use in the trend monitoring
system. This system can present recorded data for all variables as
curves. The trend monitor is part of the Remote Operator Station.
Two functions are available; “Select Trend” and “Display Trend”.
The “Select Trend” function assigns the display of trend curves to
specified variables. The operator can specify five different trend
displays with eight variables each, giving a total of forty recorded
variables display.
32 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

The “Display Trend” function displays the selected trend as

continuous curves. The present value is at the right hand side of the
display window while the previous values are displayed towards
the left. Each curve has an assigned colour.
The trend display gives tag name, tag description and the
numerical actual value of eight variables at a time.
Fuel performance system (optional)

The fuel economising system is a tool to monitor fuel consumption
and assess the efficiency of the propulsion machinery. To study
performance parameters momentary values are available.
Accumulated fuel consumption and propeller shaft power such as
for a voyage can be displayed and printed for reporting.
Calculations are based on the Distributed Processing Units making
continuous measurements. The following sensor data are required:
• Fuel oil flow for each propulsion engine.
• Both input and output flow must be measured.
• Fuel oil temperature for all input and output flows.
• Running signal for each propulsion engine.
• Shaft power (torque) for each propeller shaft.
• Ship speed.
Based on these measurements the following performance
parameters are calculated:
• Momentary fuel consumption for each engine in kg/hrs.
• Total momentary fuel consumption in kg/hrs.
• Hull efficiency in kg/nm.
• Engine efficiency for each engine in g/kWh.
• Shaft power for each shaft in MW.
• Total shaft power in MW.
Fuel consumption and power output is calculated over the voyage
period. Accumulated data includes:
• Duration of voyage in hours.
• Distance travelled in nautical miles.
• Accumulated fuel consumption for each main engine in tons.
• Total accumulated fuel consumption in tons.
• Accumulated propeller shaft power in for each shaft in MWh.
• Total accumulated propeller shaft power in MWh
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 33

Accumulated values can be reset by the operator. When doing so,

the accumulated values are printed (a post voyage report). All fuel
economising measurements and calculations are available as a
display window on any of the Remote Operator Stations.
Running hours & counters

To improve the maintenance plan and to decide which components
needs overhauling, it is important to know the running hours for
each component. The DataChief C20 running hours function
keeps track of the running hours for selected pumps, fans,
compressors, purifiers & generators etc., and present the result to
the operator on demand.
Any status signal interfaced to the DataChief C20 can be used to
count running hours. Two separate counter functions are available:
• Counter for total active running hour.
• Lap counter.
A table containing all parameters and their running hour values can
be printed on demand. Values can be manually reset when units
have been overhauled. When required, adjustments can be made
to the total running hour or lap counter for any unit.
34 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

1.5.3 Process control functions

All data acquisition, signal conditioning, signal scaling and
process control is performed by each individual Distributed
Processing Unit. This solution guarantees that local operation is
available even if the Remote Operator Stations are not functioning.
Stand by pumps
General
Pump control is located in the Distributed Processing Unit’s.
Remote control is available from the Remote Operator Stations in
two ways:
• Through the stand by pump mimic diagrams.
• Through a mimic diagram included in the monitoring and
control system.
Stand by start at low pressure
When the pressure drops below the set limit the stand by pump
automatically starts. The limit may be adjusted if an analogue
sensor is used.
Inhibit stand by start
Starting of the stand by pump is blocked after a blackout or at a
group start, until the pressure has built up. The stand by logic can
also be inhibited by an external condition, such as “main engine
stopped”, “aux engine stopped” or a similar condition.
Restart after blackout
Some units have to be automatically restarted after a blackout.
These units are included in a start sequence. The delay time defined
in the Distributed Processing Units pump logic determines the start
sequence. The operator can adjust the sequence timing.
Group start of pumps
Remote controlled pumps can be started in sequence.
Alarms from the stand by pump logic
• Stand by start alarm.
• Auto start fail or trip.
• Non stand by alarm (indicates that a stopped pump is no longer
in stand by mode).
Sensors: Pressure switches or analogue sensors may be used for
the control functions.
Limits: All limits are downloaded from the remote Operator
Station as part of its database. Limits may be adjusted from Remote
Operator Station or at the Local Operator Station.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 35

Configuration: To maintain redundancy in a two or three pump

system, the signals from the motor starters and the process are
normally routed to different Distributed Processing Unit’s. This
configuration allows the system to work even if one of the
Distributed Processing Unit fails. The stand by pump logic is also
active when the Remote Operator Station is down.
Valve control
General
Valve control is located in the Distributed Processing Unit’s.
Remote control is available from the Remote Operator Stations
through mimic diagrams.
Valve Types
Single Acting Valve: This valve type is controlled by one digital
output signal. The valve-position (closed or open) is given by the
signals by one or two limit switches.
Double-Acting Valve: This valve type is controlled by two digital
output and two input signals. The valve is opened or closed by
pulsing a relay.
Double-Acting Valve with Position Control: This valve type is
controlled by two digital outputs; two digital inputs and an analog
input signal. The valve position is set within a defined dead band
by pulsing a relay.
Additional functions
In addition, the following functions are available as part of the
valve control system.
• Pulsed output.
• Automatic closing of a set of valves.
• Automatic opening or closing of valves.
• Close on an analog setpoint, using deadband.
• Low-level Auto CLOSE Valve, remote OPEN/CLOSE
function. Close when a “low level” switch opens.
• Automatic OPEN/CLOSE of Valve Remote OPEN/CLOSE
function. Close when a “low level” switch opens.
• Valve Change-Over on Alarm with Reset.
PID controllers
The PID controller system is a set of software modules located in
the appropriate Distributed Processing Unit’s. All combinations of
PID controllers are available. Cascade control is accomplished by
connecting two controllers together. The PID controllers can be
configured from the Local or Remote Operator Station. The
following parameters are available:
36 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

• Tuning parameters (gain, integration time and derivation time).

• Controller setpoint.
• Output mode (true control mode, AUTO, or valve position
control mode, SEMIAUTO).
• Controller types (P, PI, PD or PID).
• Selection of input and output signal type.
• Input and output channel number.
• Sampling time.
Compressor control
The compressor control system is a set of software modules located
in the appropriate Distributed Processing Unit’s. The main
purpose is to maintain the air receiver pressure at a constant value.
This function includes remote manual and automatic start and stop
of compressors, restart after blackout and automatic drain control.
The compressor control system communicates with the Local or
Remote Operator Station and can be monitored or controlled from
here.
Purifier control
The purifier control system is a set of software modules located in
the appropriate Distributed Processing Unit’s. The purifier control
program is specially written to operate Alfa Laval‘s self cleaning
oil purifiers, and includes operation of the following equipment:
• Crude oil booster pump (optional).
• Crude oil temperature controller.
• Purifiers.
• Sealing valves.
• Discharge valves.
The equipment may be controlled from the Remote or Local
Operator Station. Purifier configuration is selected manually by
operating different by-pass valves directly. The purifier control
program will sense if purifiers are running in series or parallel.
Mode of operation is indicated in the mimic display by showing the
oil path as green lines. Purifier no.1 will always run as purifier,
whereas purifier no.2 may be selected to run as purifier or clarifier.
Boiler control
The boiler control system is a set of software modules located the
appropriate Distributed Processing Unit’s. These The program
consists of a standard PID controller and is adaptable to different
types of boilers. The boiler control system uses fail checking
extensively, and employs a program for controlled shut down, and
provides visible alarms.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 37

Boiler system parameters are available on the Local or Remote

Operator Station. All parameters are found in the steam system
mimic display. System information such as alarms and analogue
values are part of the normal DataChief C20 alarm and
monitoring system. The boiler control involves total control of the
following equipment:
• Fuel oil standby pumps.
• Burner motor.
• Fuel pre heater.
• Nozzles.
• Ignition unit.
• Air damper.
• Steam release valve.
These units are connected to and controlled by the appropriate
Distributed Processing Unit.
38 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

1.5.4 Power management system
Introduction
The power management system controls the power generation and

distribution on board the vessel. It includes all the automatic
functions necessary for safe and economic operation of the power
plant.
The basic system consists of one Distributed Processing Unit per

connected genearator unit. Each perform the power management
functions of the connected generator unit. The system is suitable
for electrical generators driven by a diesel engine, a steam turbine
or by the propeller shaft. The Distributed Processing Units have
different configurations and control strategies depending on the
type of drive. The Distributed Processing Units are connected to
Remote Operator Station (Remote Operator Station) which allows
the operator to initiate the same monitoring and control functions
that can be performed locally.
For complex Power management Systems an additional

Distributed Processing Unit, the dPSC, is used for mode control
etc. This is a unit giving redundancy both in function and
communication, and allows separation of local PMS CAN
processbus data traffic from other the global CAN-network of the
DataChief C20 system.
The power management system will be adapted to the specific

configuration of power generators and bus bars on the ship. In
order to comply with the latest rules of separation of functions for
alarm, control and safety, these functions have been addressed to
separate Distributed Processing Unit’s like this:
• Complex logic: A Dual Process Segment Gateway (when

needed).
• PMS control logic: A Distributed Processing Unit RiO C1 for

each generator.
• Diesel generator Safety system: A separate Distributed

Processing Unit RiO C1.
• Bus-tie Control: A Distributed Processing Unit RiO C1 for

each Bustie.
• Alarms: To Rai-16 or Rdi-32 Units.
Note: These units interact on a dual redundant CAN-bus.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 39

Generator Control Functions

Synchronizing
The power management system automatically selects and
synchronizes generators to the net as required. A Distributed
Processing Unit controls speed, deviation of voltage/frequency
and breaker.
Frequency Control/Loadsharing
When automatic mode is selected, one of the Distributed
Processing Units must be defined as Master. The Distributed
Processing Unit designated as “ No.1 Stand-By “ will
automatically be master if no other master selection is made. The
bus bar frequency and voltage values from the main switchboard
are available in all the Distributed Processing Units. The Master
mode Distributed Processing Unit is the reference for frequency
and voltage values. It maintains a constant bus frequency by
controlling its engine’s speed. The Master mode Distributed
Processing Unit controls the bus frequency while the stand-by
Distributed Processing Units controls the load-sharing.
Asymmetric Loadsharing
The Distributed Processing Unit has an asymmetric or unbalanced
load-sharing function that will force one generator to run at almost
maximum load for a pre-defined period, while the second
generator is operating at minimal load and fuel consumption. At
the expiration of the defined period, the generators swap loads.
Symmetric Loadsharing
If two or more generators are running and asymmetric
load--sharing has not been requested, the load is shared equally
between the generators.
Load-dependent Start/Stop of the Stand-by Generators
Each stand-by Distributed Processing Unit will automatically
start, synchronise and connect its generator according to its
assigned order-of-priority and whenever it receives one of the
following requests:
• Switch-on request from the heavy consumer(s) if the generators
in operation cannot provide enough power.
• A start request from another Distributed Processing Unit when
its operating generator has developed a fault, which prevents it
from maintaining its share of the load.
• A start request from another Distributed Processing Unit when
its operating generator is approaching the point of overload.
40 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

It is possible to override or block the low load auto-stop feature.

Whenever blocked, the stand-by generator will keep on running,
independent of the load parameters. This feature is especially
useful when a heavy consumer (e.g. a ship’s bow thruster) is
required to be started instantaneously at irregular intervals.
Automatic Start-and-Connect After a Power Blackout.The power
blackout logic is triggered when the power management system
detects that all breakers are disconnected and that the line voltage
is low. (<10% of normal). In a power blackout situation, all of the
generators controlled by each stand-by Distributed Processing
Unit will start and connect to the bus.
Supervision of Heavy Consumer Switch-on
Each Distributed Processing Unit is able to supervise the switch-on
control heavy consumers to ensure that a switch-on will not cause
a power blackout. If the demand for power exceeds the capacity of
the operating generators, the power management system will start
up and connect a stand-by generator to ensure that sufficient
capacity is available before the request for switch-on is granted.
Power Management Functions with Shaft
Generator
Main Functions
One Distributed Processing Unit control the Shaft Generator
Distributed Processing Unit, whereas other Distributed Processing
Units control the bus tie breaker and the other auxiliary generators.
The Shaft Generator Distributed Processing Unit logic is adaptable
to various switch board configuration.
The following functions are available:
• Control of the shaft generator circuit breaker and the bus tie
breaker with automatic synchronisation.
• Control of the connection and disconnection of bow- and stern
thruster.
• Overall control of the Distributed Processing Units that control
the auxiliary generator sets.
Operational Modes/Mode Control
The power management system allows many different modes of
operation. The following standard modes are provided, an
example with 1 SG, two DG’s, two busties and a bowthruster:
• Harbour: Both DG’s running. Both busties closed. This mode
allows the bow thruster to be started. If load is low, and
bowthruster not running the standby DG will automatically be
disconnected and stopped. This is blocked if the thruster is
running or the STOP BLOCK switch in the Diesel Generator
Distributed Processing Unit is activated.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 41

• At sea: The SG is running. Both busties closed. The bow

thruster is blocked for starting. Both DG’s are stopped and
standby ready for start.
• Cargo handling: Bustie 2 is open. One or two DG’s power
consumers on port busbar. The shaft generator is powering
heavy consumers on stand-by busbar. The bow thruster is
blocked for starting.
• Manoeuvre: Bustie 1 is open. One or two DG’s power
consumers on port busbar. The shaft generator power the bow
thruster only.
Transition between these modes is possible in two ways:
• Mode control: Selection of one of the predefined operational
mode, leading to a set of actions which the operator has to
perform in order to put the Power Generating System into that
mode.
• One-Touch Mode Control: Selection of one of the predefined
operational mode, leading to a sequence of automatic events to
put the Power Generating system into that mode. This
one-touch control to be made from the Remote Operator
Station.
Always when changing mode from shaft generator powering the
net to auxiliary generators powering the net or to split net
operation, the Shaft Generator Distributed Processing Unit will
give a start and connect command to at least two auxiliary
generators. Upon reception of this command, the power
management system will only start one diesel at a time.
Shaft Generator Overload
The Shaft Generator Distributed Processing Unit will check for
overload of the shaft generator. If overloaded for more than a
predefined period of time, a request for split net is generated.
Shaft- And Auxiliary Generator In Parallel
There is an adjustable time limit for parallel load sharing between
shaft- and auxiliary generators. The bus-tie will automatically be
disconnected when parallel load sharing exceeds this time limit.
Shaft Generator Control Functions
The shaft generator is interfaced to the integrated control and
alarm/monitoring system via the Shaft Generator Distributed
Processing Unit. The Shaft Generator Distributed Processing Unit
has facilities for remote start and stop. A speed drop function
versus load enable the shaft generator to be run in parallel with
diesel generators.
When the controller is set to remote operation mode, the following
functions are available:
42 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

• Manual start from keyboard and mimic diagrams

• Manual stop from keyboard and mimic diagrams
• Automatic stop in case of alarms on main engine or the shaft
generator itself
• Monitoring of critical parameters when the shaft generator is
running. (Additional function to controller, with its own safety
functions for the shaft generator)
When the shaft generator is connected, the master Distributed
Processing Unit will do loadsharing on the diesel generator in
parallel with the shaft generator. The frequency on the busbar is a
result of the ME speed. Parallel load sharing between shaft
generator and diesel generators are limited in time, controlled from
the Power Management System.
The Shaft Generator Distributed Processing Unit and the
Distributed Processing Units perform the functions for the Power
Management System completely independent of the Alarm- and
Monitoring System.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 43

1.6 Technical specifications
1.6.1 Introduction
The following is a summary of the technical specifications for the
DataChief C20 Alarm and monitoring system with process
control and power management. Kongsberg Maritime Ship
Systems is engaged in continues development of its products and
reserves the right to alter specifications without prior notice.
1.6.2 Operator Control Panel (OCP)

• Supply voltage: 24 V DC, ± 5% ripple (Input filter included)
• Power consumption: 4 W Nom (12 W when lamp test
activated).
• Ambient operational conditions: 0_C to + 70_C inside
console.
• Maximum relative humidity: 97% non-condensing
• Ambient storage temperature: - 30_C to + 80_C
• Production burn-in: + 70_C for 72 hours
• Type approved by classification societies: DNV, LRS, BV,
GL, RINA, NK, ABS, KR, PRS, MRS (Russia), CCS (China).
• Cable connections:
- Power terminal: 2.5 mm2
- Signal terminal: 2.5 mm2
• Cable length to PC: 2,5 m.
• Weight of unit: 4 kg (cables and terminals 0.5 kg)
• Dimensions: W482.6 H265.8 D45 mm.
• Panel cut-out: W450 +1 H257 + 1 mm.
• Mounting: Flush mounting with screws or free standing in
cabinet.
• Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC): The Operator
Control Panel complies with the classification society
requirements regarding electrostatic discharge, radiated
susceptibility and conducted susceptibility. In addition it is
prepared to meet the EU directive valid from 1.1.96 regarding
radiated emission and conducted emission.
1.6.3 Midi Operator Station (MOS)

• Supply voltage: 18 - 32 V DC ±5 % ripple.
44 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

• Power consumption: 10 W.
• Ambient operational temperature: -15_C to + 70_C
• Max. rel. Humidity: 96% non-condensing.
• Ambient storage temperature: 25°C to +70°C in a dry area
with approx. 70% humidity.
• Display: TFT colour, 5.7”, 320 x 240 pixels.
• Housing: Cast aluminium back, polycarbonate front.
• Weight of unit: 1.5 kg.
• Dimensions: W252 H144 B70 mm.
• Panel cut-out: 242 x 134 mm.
• Mounting: Bracket for table, ceiling and wall. Flush mount
with removable corners.
• Shock and vibration: DnV Class B, IACS E10 (Direct mount
on engines, compressors, etc.).
• EMC properties: According to IACS E10, IEC 60945.
1.6.4 Local Operator Station (LOS)

• Supply voltage: 18 – 32 V DC
• Power consumption: 6 W
• Ambient operational temperature: 0_C to + 70_C
• Dimension:
- Outline: W240 x H144 x D50 mm.
- Cut out: W211 x H138 mm.
• Mounting: Screws (4 Pcs M4)
1.6.5 Watch Bridge Unit (WBU)

• Supply voltage: 18 - 32 V DC
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 45

• Dimension:
1.6.6 Watch Cabin Unit (WCU)

• Dimension:
1.6.7 Remote Analogue Input (RAi-16)

• Power consumption:
- Module Nominal 7,5W, Max. 10W
- Current mode sensors add Nominal 9W, Max. 11
• Ambient operational temperature: - 15_C to + 70_C
• Max relative humidity: 96% non-condensing
• Mechanical environment:
- DnV Class B
- IACS E10 (Direct mount on engines, compressors etc.)
• EMC properties: According to IACS E10, EN60945
• Type Approval: DNV, LRS, BV, GL, RINA, NK, ABS, KR,
PRS, MRS (Russia), CCS (China)
• Specification: ISO per module in power port: 50 VDC
continues 50 VAC 1 minute.
• Isolation:
- Power Complete isolated: (DC/DC Converter)
- I/O: No isolation between channels. Chassis used as 0 Volt
reference.
- CAN: Complete isolated (Opto coupler).
46 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

• Signal types:
- Input differential: CMV 10 [ V ]
- Voltage Scaling: ± 0,1/1/5/10 [Volt]
- Current Scaling: ± 1/5/10/20 [mA]
- Technical units: Free range
Resistance Temperature Detectors (RTD):
- Scaling: PT100, PT1000 [Ω]
- Range: PT1000 0-200ºC, 0-600º PT100 0-200ºC,
0-800ºC
• Accuracy: Voltage measurement A/D ±0.002 %
• Accuracy w/signal conditioning: ± 0.4 %
• Sensor excitation voltage and current: 30-40 mA nominal.
Fused at 100mA per channel or 350 ma for the whole module,
with overload indicator.
• BIST (Built In Self Test): Module temp, Power, Sensor
excitation overload.
1.6.8 Remote Analogue Input (RAi-10tc)

• Power consumption: Nominal 7,5W, Max. 10W
- DnV Class B
• Specification: Input: Differential CMV 10[V]. ISO per module
in power port: 50 VDC continues 50 VAC 1 minute.
• Isolation:
- Power Complete isolated (DC/DC Converter)
- I/O No isolation between channels. Chassis used as 0
Volt reference.
- CAN Complete isolated (Opto coupler).
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 47

• Signal types:
- Thermocouples with Cold Junction compensation
- According to IEC 584
- Element: R/S/J/E/N 0-200, 0-600ºC
- Element: B 0-600ºC
- Element: T 0-200ºC
- Element: K 0-200, 0-600, 0-1200ºC
- Resistance Temperature Detectors (RTD)
- Scaling PT100, PT1000 [Ω]
- Range PT1000 0-200ºC, 0-600º PT100 0-200ºC,
0-800ºC
• Accuracy: Voltage measurement A/D ±0.002 %
1.6.9 Remote Digital Input (RDi-32 &

RDi-32a)
• Power consumption: Nominal 8W
- DnV Class B
• Isolation:
RDi-32:
- Input: Supplied from 24V DC Main power
- Power: Isolated from Module chassis
- RDi-32a:
- Input: Isolated between channels (Opto coupler)
- Power: Isolated from Module chassis
48 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

• Signal types: On/off

• Specification:
- RDi-32: Dry contact
- RDi-32a: Active signal 24VDC or AC (50-70 Hz)
• Sensor excitation voltage and current: only for RDi-32 6 mA
@ 24VDC nominal.
1.6.10 Remote Analogue Output (RAo-8)

• Power consumption: Nominal 8.5W, Max. 10W
- DnV Class B
• Isolation:
- Power: Complete isolated (DC/DC Converter)
- I/O: No isolation between channels. Chassis used as 0 Volt
reference.
• Signal types:
- Voltage Scaling: ± 0,1/1/5/10[Volt]
- Current Scaling: ± 1/5/10/20 [mA]
• Accuracy: Voltage conversion D/A ±0.1 %
• Resolution: 12 bit
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 49

• Bandwidth: 10 [Hz]
1.6.11 Remote Digital Output (RDo-16)

- DnV Class B
• Signal types: Digital Output
• Specification: All outputs max. 3 Amps 230V AC Relay:
Resistive load 1 pole change over contact.
• Isolation:
- Output: Isolation between channels (relays)
1.6.12 Remote Input/Output (RIO-C1)

- DnV Class B
50 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003


• Weight of unit: 2 kg.
• Isolation: Ref.: Engineering Guide 656
• Digital output: – - All outputs max. 3 Amps 250VAC (relay).
Relay for resistive load 1 pole change over (NO/NC). Solid state
for inductive load (solenoid driver in parallel) 24V DC.
• Analogue output:
- Range: ±22mA
- Accuracy w/signal conditioning: ± 0.5 [%]
• Analogue input ACV (1-phase):
- Input: Max. 30Vrms
- Voltage Scaling: 30 [Volt]
- Frequency scaling: 0-90 [Hz]
- Accuracy w/ signal conditioning: ± 1 [%]
• Analogue input IAC:
- Input: Max 1A
- Current scaling: 0-1A
- Accuracy w/signal conditioning: ± 1 [%]
• Input from pickup:
- 24V DC (counter input): – - 5 KHz
• Analogue/digital input, flexible: – - For details, see separate
data sheet for RAi-16.
• Digital Input: – - For details, see separate data sheet for
RDi-32.
• Derived calculated variables:
- KW active power
- KVAr reactive power
- COS ϕ
- Frequency

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 51


- DnV Class B
• 2 ways isolation:
- I/O Communication.
- Power Communication.
• Digital output:
- All outputs max. 3 Amps 230VAC
- Relay: Resistive load 1 pole change over.
• Digital input:
- Dry contact, high side or low side switch
- Sensor excitation voltage and current: 6 mA @ 24VDC
nominal.
• Isolation:
- CAN: Complete isolated (Opto coupler)
- Input: Isolation between channels (Opto coupler)
- Output: Isolation between channels (relays)
- Power: Isolated from module chassis

- Maximum 4g (allows direct mounting on engines,
compressors, etc.)
52 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003


- Power I/O
• Serial interfaces: 2 CAN ports for redundant communication
interface (galvanic isolated).
• 4 Digital output:
- All outputs max. 3 Amps 250VAC (relay).
- 1 pole change over. Inductive load.
• 3 phase ACV input:
- Voltage scaling: 29 Volt
- Frequency scaling: 0-90 Hz
- Accuracy: 1 %
• 3 phase IAC. Generator current (MSB):
- Input: Max 15A
- Over current scaling: 0-15A
- Maximum readable input: 15A.max 0.5 s
- Technical units: free range
- Accuracy: 1 %
- Over current: 5 %
• 3 phase IAC. generator current (internal):
- Input: Maximum 15A
- Maximum readable input: 5A
- Maximum input: 15A.max 0.5 s
- Accuracy: 1 %
• 3 Digital Input:
- Require dry contact or opto coupler.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 53

• Trip display and reset switch: Local 7-segment display on

module, reason for trip indication. Reset switch on module.


- Maximum 4g (allows direct mounting on engines,
compressors, etc.)
- Power I/O
• 8 Digital output:
- All outputs max. 3 Amps 250VAC (relay)
- 1 pole change over. Inductive load.
• 2 ACV input (bus and generator):
- Voltage scaling: 29 Volt
- Frequency scaling: 0-90 Hz
- Accuracy: 1 [%]
• 1 phase IAC. generator current input:
- Input: Max 15A
- Maximum readable input: 5A.
- Maximum input: 15A.max 0.5 s
- Accuracy: 1 %
54 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

• 4 Digital inputs:
- Require dry contact or opto coupler.
• 2 Analogue output:
- Range: 22mA and 11V
- Accuracy with signal conditioning: 1.0 %
1.6.16 Voltage Converter Controller

(VCC)
- Maximum 0.7g
• Isolation:
- Isolation between input terminal and ground: 2000VAC
- Isolation between input terminals: 2000VAC
• 2 ACV output synchronisation:
- 1 phase generator and 1 phase bus.
- Range: 0-24VAC
- Accuracy: 1.0 %
• 3 phase ACV output protection:
- 3 phase generator.
- Range: 0-24VAC
- Accuracy: 1.0 %
• 1 DC output (Protection backup power):
- Voltage: 24VDC
- Maximum current: 1000mA
- Accuracy: 5.0 %
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 55


1.6.17 Process Segment Starcoupler

(PSS)
• Supply voltage: 18-32 VDC
• Power Consumption: Nominal 4 W Max. 5 W
• Ambient operational temperature: –15_C to +70 _C
• Ambient storage temperature: -25_C to +70_C
- DnV class B
• EMC properties: According IACS E10, EN60945
• Weight of module: 1 kg.
• Specification: Isolation power port: 50 VDC continuous 50
VAC 1 minute.
• Isolation:
1.6.18 Dual Process Segment Controller

(dPSC)
• Supply voltage: 18-32 VDC
• Power Consumption: Nominal 12 W Max. 15 W
• Ambient operational temperature: –15_C to +70 _C
• Ambient storage temperature: -25_C to +70_C
- DnV class B
- IACS E10 ( Direct mount on engines, compressors etc. )
• EMC properties: According IACS E10, EN60945
• Weight of module: 1.6 kg.
56 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

• Specification: Isolation power port: 50 VDC continuous 50

VAC 1 minute.
• Isolation:
- Serial line: Complete isolated (Opto coupler)
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 57

2 GETTING STARTED
2.1 Introduction
This chapter teaches you how to use the control functions and
displays of the different DataChief C20 operator stations. It is
intended for personnel just starting to use the system. The
following subjects are covered:
- Using the Remote Operator Station
- Using the Midi Operator Station
- Using the Local Operator Station
- The Watch Calling System
- Using the Watch Bridge Unit
- Using the Watch Cabin Unit
58 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Getting started
2.2 Using the Remote Operator Station

2.2.1 Understanding the Operator
Control Panel
The Operator Control Panel often called OCP is a specially
designed keyboard that provides easy access to the operator
functions. It is divided into separate function areas. Push buttons
are combined with lamps to indicate alarms, status of the Extended
Alarm System and to indicate main system functions.
Overview
The following illustration shows the layout ofthe OperatorControl
Panel. The different buttons found on the panel can be divided into
groups and are explained in the following.
Red LEDs - alarm group buttons

Green LEDs - watch function buttons
Yellow LEDs - project dependent buttons
Mimic buttons
Numeric
Power on LED keyboard
Standard function buttons
Trackball
buttons
Keyboard Trackball.
connector

Alarm functions & display buttons
Figure 14 Operator Control Panel (OCP) layout.

Numeric keyboard and trackball buttons
DELETE Used to delete numeric input (from right to
left) during an input sequence.
(Backspace).
SPACE Used for passive settings for alarm limits etc.
ENTER Ends a sequence of numeric input or acti-

vates editing.
PREVI- Displays the previous page in the selected

OUS page group.
PAGE (Page Up)
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 59

NEXT Displays the next page in the selected page

PAGE group.
(Page Down)
ARROW Used to move the cursor or the high--lighted
BUTTON field. There are four arrow keys; left, right, up
and down.
READ Used for addressing an object (i.e. pump,
valve) after placing the cursor over it by mov-
ing the trackball.
DE-- Used for giving a STOP, CLOSE or DEACTI-
ACTIVATE VATE command to an object after addressing
/ STOP it using the READ button.
ACTIVATE Used for giving a START, OPEN or ACTIVATE
/ START command to an object after addressing it
using the READ button.
Alarm group buttons

LO, FO, FW, EX, When a new alarm occurs, the corresponding
CW, CA, DO, BW, alarm group lamp starts flashing, and the
MI, DS, BO, BR, alarm buzzer is activated. To display informa-
OM, DG, SG, ES, tion about the alarm, push the button. New
FI, TS, ST, LS…. alarms are displayed in red colour, acknowl-
edged alarms in yellow. The indicator stops
flashing when all alarms in the group have
been acknowledged, but remains lit until all
alarm conditions have returned to normal.
INHIBIT POINTS When this button is pushed, the colour
graphics display shows a list of inhibit
sources.
SYSTEM FAILURE When a system failure occurs, the correspon-
ding indicator starts flashing, and the alarm
buzzer is activated. To display information
about the system failure, push the button. The
indicator stops flashing when the alarm has
been acknowledged, but remains lit until all
alarm conditions have returned to normal.
Alarm function and display buttons

SOUND OFF When an alarm occurs the alarm buzzer and
engine room horn is activated. Push the
SOUND OFF button to stop it.
ALARM SUMMARY Shows all active and unacknowledged alarms
on the colour graphics display. Up to twenty-
six alarms can be displayed simultaneously. If
there are more alarms, use the NEXT PAGE
and PREVIOUS PAGE buttons to see them
all.
60 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Getting started
ALARM HISTORY Displays the last 2000 alarm events, with time
and date. Twentysix alarms are displayed on
each page. The last alarms are at the top of
the list. To turn the pages, using the NEXT
PAGE and PREVIOUS PAGE buttons.
ALARM This button is used to acknowledge alarms. If
ACKNOWLEDGE an Operator Control Panel group button has
been pushed, the alarm acknowledge button
will acknowledge all unacknowledged alarms
on the colour graphics display. If more than 26
new alarms have occurred, the next page will
automatically be displayed. If an Operator
Control Panel alarm group button has not
been pushed, pushing the Alarm Acknowl-
edge button will acknowledge the latest three
alarms displayed in the lower right corner of
the display.

COUNTERS Displays counters and lap counters informa-
DISPLAY tion.
DEVIATION Menu for input and display of parameters for
PARAM. CONFIG. deviation calculation of exhaust gas tempera-
tures.
GROUP / ALARM Toggles between all measuringpoints and the
points in a group having an alarm status.
GROUP DISPLAY Displays all measuringpoints within an Oper-
ator Control Panel alarm group.
SELECTED Displays preselected measuringpoints as bar-
BARGR. DISPLAY graphs.
SELECTED Displays preselected measuringpoints.
POINTS DISPLAY
SELECTED TREND Display preselected measuringpoints as trend
DISPLAY curves.
SET DATE & TIME Used to adjust date & time.
SYSTEM INFO Displays system parameters and functions.
DISPLAY
TAG DETAILS Menu used to display details for measuring--
points and to change their parameters.
Logging buttons
AUTO LOG Menu used to enable and adjust the auto log
CONFIG printout time.
MISC. LOGS Menu used to activate printout of logs and set
up the printer.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 61

Tank and cargo functions

SHIPS DISPLAY Displays total volume for each tank content
type. Trim/list and draught display. Menu for
manual trim/list specification and input and
sea specific gravity input.
LEVEL CORR. Display of raw level/ullage, corrections for
DISPLAY trim, list, sensor offset, specific gravity and
corrected level/ullage.
GENERAL TANK Tank level [m], filling [%], volume [m3], spe-
DISPLAY cific gravity [t/m3] and weight [t] display.
SEA HARBOUR Toggles between SEA and HARBOUR mode.
SELECT This can be used to suppress tank alarms
during the voyage.
CARGO TANK Tank content type, ullage [m], actual tempera-
DISPLAY ture [ºC], volume [m3], filling [%], volume
correction factor, volume at 15 ºC [m3], weight
air and US Barrels at 60 ºF.
CARGO API Tank content type, API, density at vac. 15ºC,
DISPLAY density in air at 15ºC, density in air TºC, tem-
perature (T) [ºC], density correction factor and
density at actual temperature.
Mimic display button

MIMIC DISPLAY Displays mimic window for process monitoring
and/or process control.
Control functions buttons

HIGH / LOW Toggles between high and low speed of
pumps and fans.
RESET Reset function for controllable objects such as
pumps, fans, compressors and generators.
MASTER Master function for pumps, fans, compressors
and generators.
1.ST. STAND BY 1.st standby or stand by selection function for
pumps, fans, compressors and generators.
NEXT STAND BY Stand by selection function for pumps, fans,
compressors and generators.
AUTO / MAN Auto/manual (semi auto) mode selection for
pumps, fans, compressors, controllers and
generators.
Viewing conditions and testing buttons

MONITOR OCP Menu to decreasing or increasing illumination
DISPLAY for the Operator Control Panel (OCP) and co-
lour graphics display on the Bridge.
ALARM TEST To test the alarm buzzers, alarm display, net
communication and alarm printer push the
button. To turn the test off push the button
again.
LAMP TEST To test all indicator lamps on the Operator
Control Panel push the button.
62 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Getting started
Watch indication and calling functions buttons

BRIDGE WATCH Initiates Bridge Watch (unattended engine
room). This means that the engine watch re-
sponsibility is transferred to the bridge.
ENGINE WATCH Initiates Engine Watch. This means that the
engine watch responsibility is in engine con-
trol room mode.
CHIEF ENG. ON When this indicator lamp is lit the Chief En-
DUTY gineer is on duty, both in bridge-- and engine
watch. The ON DUTY indicator in the Chief
Engineers cabin and in the engineers day-
rooms are lit.
CALL ALL When this button is pushed, the indicator
ENGINEERS lamp starts flashing, and the indicators and
buzzers in all WatchCall panels in the en-
gineers quarters are activated. To deactivate
this function push the button again.
ENGINEERS When one or more of the 1st to 4th engineer
ON DUTY on duty lamps are lit, the engineer on duty is
in charge of the watch. The ON DUTY indica-
tor in the engineers cabin and dayrooms are
lit.
CALL DUTY When this button is pushed the indicator lamp
ENGINEER starts flashing and the indicators and buzzer
on the WatchCall panel in the duty engineers
quarter is activated. To deactivate this func-
tion push the button again.
Note: This function is only available as an
alternative to a 4th Engineer button.
2.2.2 Systems without Operator Control

Panel
Some systems are delivered without Operator Control Panels.
These systems are operated through standard keyboard and mouse.
In these systems the Operator Control Panel is displayed on the
colour graphics monitor. Operation is similar for both types of
systems.
1 Push the F1 function key to display the Operator Control
Panel.
2 Use the mouse to push the buttons and select the various
display pages.
The following fuction keys are used:
- F1: Operator Control Panel (OCP) display
- F2: Alarm/group display
- F3: Sound off
- F4: Alarm acknowledge
- F5: Tag tetails
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 63

Figure 15 Typical Operator Control Panel displayed on

monitor.
2.2.3 Understanding the display

The Remote Operator Station includes a standard colour graphics
display. The operator interacts with the display through the
Operator Control Panel or through keyboard and mouse.
Overview
The following illustration explains the layout of the Remote
Operator Station display.
• About button: Push the button to display information about the
software version etc.
• Title window: Contains the title of the information currently
displayed in the main window.
64 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Getting started
About button Status window

Title window Time window
Main window
Alarm window
Function window
Figure 16 Main areas of the Remote Operator Station display.
• Status window: The status window is divided into two

columns. These contains important status information for user
settings. The following abbreviations are used:
- Buz - OCP buzzer disabled.
- ACK - Acknowledge limitation override enabled.
- Mim - Mimic access override enabled.
• Time window: Shows current date and time.
→ Refer to page 107 for information on “How to change time zone”.
• Main window: Contains the main display information such as
alarm lists, bargraphs, trend displays,configuration data,mimic
diagrams etc.
• Function window: Displays information related to user input.
• Alarm window: Displays the last four alarms independent of
the information displayed in the main window.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 65

2.3 Using the Midi Operator Station
2.3.1 Overview
The Midi Operator Station, often called MOS is a specially
designed operator panel that provides easy access to operator
functions. It is used as a local operator station in larger systems or
as the main operator station for more limited systems.
The display examples shown in this manual are not always an exact
copy of what you will see on the screen, as the presentation
depends on your system configuration and choices of set-up.
2.3.2 Understanding the keyboard

Some of the key functions are general and can be applied at any
time, other key functions are related to certain menu(s) and can
only be applied when in the appropriate menu.
Escape
Page down
Page up
Acknowledge
Sound off
Clear
Function keys
F1 to F4
Figure 17 Keyboard layout.
ESC Escape. Removes menus. Goes back to the previous picture in up

to five steps by pushing repeatedly.
MENU Turns menus on. The displayed menu will vary with the
operational context.
ENTER Go to submenu or display. Confirms insertion and editing of data.

Gives access to set-up displays.
66 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Getting started
Page up. Moved the displayed information up a page in the selected

group.
Page down. Moved the displayed information down a page in the

selected group.
Sound off. Push to turn audible alarms off.
ACK Alarm acknowledge.
Four-way navigator key. Moves a square cursor up/down to select

text in data displays. Moves a square cursor left/right/up/down and
to select objects in mimic pictures.
F1 - F4 Function keys. The function is specified by the text next to the key
(left side). Function keys have a one minute time-out to avoid
accidental input. Push the Page up or Page down keys to active the
functions keys again.
0-9 Alpha-numeric keys for insertion of letters and numbers. Push the
button repeatedly until the desired letter or number is displayed.
.-_ Key to insert the following special characters (. - _). Push the
button repeatedly until the desired character is displayed.
CLR Clear. Deletes data in enter or edit mode.
2.3.3 Understanding the display

The midi operator station includes a bright colour flat panel
display. The operator interacts with the display through the
keyboard.
• Window title: Contains the title of the information currently
displayed in the main window.
• Menu window: Displays the various menus available.
• Scroll bar: Indicates how much of the total information in this
window is displayed (similar to scroll bars used in standard
Windows applications).
• Alarm window: Displays the last alarm independent of the
information displayed in the main window.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 67

Window title
Menu window
Scroll bar
Alarm window
Figure 18 Display layout example.
Window title
Indicates that
additional
function
buttons are
available. Use
the Page up
and Page
Down buttons
to display
them.
Alarm window
Figure 19 Display layout example including graphics.
68 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Getting started
Indicates that
additional
information is
available. Use
the navigator
key to display
it.
Scroll bar
Alarm window
Figure 20 Display layout example.
2.3.4 Menu overview

The following menus are available:
Main Menu
1 Alarm Menu
2 DPU Overview
3 Tag Selection Menu
4 Configuration Menu
5 Help
Alarm Menu
1 Alarm History
2 Alarm Summary
3 Alarm Group Display
Tag Menu
1 Tag Details
2 Mimic
3 Alarm Status
4 Main Menu
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 69

Tag Selection Menu

1 Control Menu
2 PMS Menu
3 MMI Tags
4 All Tags
Control Menu
1 Pumps
2 Valves
3 Controllers
4 Standby Sets
PMS Menu
1 Power Manager
2 Switch boards
3 Generators
4 Aux Breakers
5 Sync Breakers
Configuration
1 User Access
2 Keyboard/Screen
3 Advanced
4 Printer
5 Self check
70 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Getting started
2.4 Using the Local Operator Station
2.4.1 Understanding the Local Operator

Station
Overview
The Local Operator Station is used for local access to the
Distributed Processing Units for inspection of process variables,
local operation of equipment, adjustment of parameters and
inspection of the built-in diagnostics.
LOS
CAN A
dPSC
DPU DPU DPU DPU

001 002 003 004
dPSC
CAN B
Figure 21 Local Operator Station on CAN bus segment.

The Local Operator Station (LOS) can connect to all Distributed
Processing Units (DPU) connected to the same CAN-bus. From
the local operator station you select a Distributed Processing Unit.
As soon as connection is established, the Local Operator Station
is able to control it.
Alarm indicators
Display - Display Line # 1 : Menu Name Line -----------
- Display Line # 2 : Top Menu Item /Selection Line
- Display Line # 3 :
On line - Display Line # 4 : Prompt Texts for F1,F2,F3,F4
indicator
Push
buttons
Alarm indicator 6
Figure 22 Local Operator Station layout
The functions available are defined by the functionality of each
individual type of Distributed Processing Unit. Pushbuttons are
combined with lamps to indicate alarms, status of the extended
alarm system and to indicate main system functions. The Local
operator Station has the following main functions:
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 71

Indicators
On Line Indicates that the Local Operator Station is
connected to an active Distributed Processing
Unit.
Alarm 1 -- 5 These alarm indicators are active in an alarm
system application. Labels are ship depend-
ent.
Alarm 6 -- Unit Fail Indicates that the Local Operator Station is
unable to get in touch with a Distributed Pro-
cessing Unit.
Other LED indica- Many of the buttons have LED indicators.
tors These indicators have different meanings de-
pendent on the menu being operated.
Display
Line 1 Displays module name, menu name, tag
name etc. The display text depends on the
menu selected.
Line 2 Displays the menu item that will be selected if
the Menu Down button is pressed
Line 3 Application dependent information
Line 4 Application dependent information
Push buttons
MENU Used to return to the menu level above the
o UP current menu.
MENU Used to select a more detailed menu for the
i DOWN item currently displayed in the second display
line.
SELECT Used to scroll the three bottom lines on the
u UP display to select a new menu, a tag or a para-
meter. Display lines are scrolled down.
SELECT Used to scroll the three bottom lines for selec-
d DOWN tion of a new menu, a tag or a parameter Dis-
play lines are scrolled up.
ADJUST Used to adjust the value of the selected para-
+ UP meter (displayed in the second line). The
value is increased.
ADJUST Used to adjust the value of the selected para-
- DOWN meter (displayed in the second line). The
value is decreased.
DEFAULT Used to jump to the first item in the selected
r menu.
ENTER Used to confirm value adjustment and store
e adjusted value.
ARROW Navigation and adjustment buttons. Used to
p BUTTONS switch between overview 1 and 2. Used to
force maximum adjustment speed, and to se-
n
lect next and previous tags when Tag Details
are displayed.
72 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Getting started
F1--F4 Function buttons, the function depends on the

1 selected menu.
ACK Used to acknowledge alarms.
a
SOUND Used to turn the alarm sound off.
s OFF
TEST Used to verify that lamps and buzzer are
t functioning. Also used by the Local Operator
Station menu for other tests.
LOS top menu
DPU 001/01.00.20 _RAi16_
DPU 002/01.00.21 _RDi16_
DPU 003/01.00.22 _RAi16_
RAi16 Top Menu
Alarm History
ALARM DETAILS
Alarm Summary
ALARM DETAILS
Tag Overview Menu
RAi16 Tag Overview
Tag Details An.Input
Parameter Explanation
48
DPU 004/01.00.23 _RAi16_
Figure 23 Typical Local Operator Station menu structure.
2.4.2 Menu structure

The Local Operator Station menu structure is a tree structure,
similar to that found in many Microsoft Windows programs.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 73

1 Use the MENU UP and MENU DOWN buttons to go

between different menu levels.
2 Use the SELECT UP and SELECT DOWN buttons to

scroll up and down each menu.
2.4.3 How to access menus

The Local Operator Station can only be connected to one
Distributed Process Unit at a time. Selecting the Distributed
Process Unit is done from the Local Operator Stations Top Menu.
Do the following:
- At power on the LOS top menu will automatically be

displayed.
1 If the top menu is not displayed, repeatedly push the MENU

UP button until the LOS top menu is displayed.
- Depending on the application, the display may look
something like this:
LOS top menu;Select dpu:

>DPU 001/01.00.20 _RAi16_
DPU 002/01.00.21 _RDi16_
DPU 003/01.00.22 _RAi16_
Figure 24 Local Operator Station top menu
- The LOS top menu presents a list of available Distributed

Processing Units (DPU) on the CAN bus.

scroll the list of Distributed Process Units.
3 To view data for a Distributed Processing Unit move its
name to the second line in the display.
4 Push the MENU DOWN button to activate the top menu for
that Distributed Processing Unit.
- The online indicator is lit.
74 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Getting started
2.4.4 How to move between menu levels
1 Moving from one menu level to another, is done by pushing

the MENU UP or MENU DOWN buttons:
2.4.5 How to move inside a menu

After selecting a Distributed Processing Unit (see “How to access
menus” above) the top menu for that unit is displayed. Depending
on the unit type, the display may look something like this:
- RAi16 top menu --- DPU 001/01.00.20

>Tag Overview Menu
Alarm History
|Discon|
Figure 25 Distributed Processing Unit top menu.

scroll the list of menu items for that Distributed Processing
Unit.
2 When the desired menu item is displayed on the second line,

push the MENU DOWN button. This activates that menu
item.
3 To leave this menu item and return to the LOS top menu,
push the F1 button.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 75

2.5 The watch calling system

2.5.1 Overview
The watch calling system is designed to allow periodically
unmanned engine-room. It consists of:
• Watch Bridge Units (WBU).
• Watch Cabin Units (WCU).
• Remote Operator Station.
The Watch Bridge Units are used for
• Indicate Watch Responsible area.
• Indicate who is On Duty.
• Indicate the current alarm status.
• Sounds a buzzer whenever a new alarm condition occurs and
someone is On Duty.
• Allows you to contact (call) duty personnel.
The Watch Cabin Units are used for
• Indicates who is On Duty.
• Indicates the current alarm status.
• Indicates when you are being called and who is calling.
• Sounds a buzzer whenever a new alarm condition occurs.
Figure 26 Basic Watch Calling System components.
2.5.2 How does the Watch Calling repeat

alarm feature work
The repeat alarm feature of the Watch Calling System monitors all
responses to an alarm condition to ensure that the alarm is
acknowledged. The repeat alarm feature distributes the alarms
using three sequences to ensure that the alarm will not go
unacknowledged:
76 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Getting started
The first-time/original alarm is relayed to:

- The area designated as Watch Responsible.
- The On Duty engineers Watch Cabin Units.
- The Watch Cabin Units in all public areas.
The second-time/1st repeat alarm:

After a set period of time, if the alarm remains unacknowledged,
it is repeated and relayed to:
- The On Duty engineers Watch Cabin Units.
The third-time/2nd repeat alarm:

After a set period of time, if the alarm is still not acknowledged,
it is repeated and relayed to:
- The Watch Cabin Units for ALL QUALIFIED engineers.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 77

2.6 Using the Watch Bridge Unit
2.6.1 Explanation of controls and

indicators
Two different types of Watch Bridge Units are available:
• The LCD-type has a 4 row by 40 characters display and seven
alarm groups.
• The LED-type has nineteen alarm groups.
The following illustrations describes the main functionality of the
two types.
Used to SELECT alarm summary, selected Used to display

points summary or time display. TAG DETAILS.
Indicates the These alarms
officer having are divided into
on-duty status. groups for
handling and
defining priority.
Indicate if the
engineers safety
system is active.
Used to call on
duty officers. SYSTEM FAIL
Indicates that
the unit has
failed.
LAMP TEST
Push to check Indicates the location Used to scroll SOUND OFF
that all indi- having watch alarms on the Push to silence
cators are OK. responsability. display the buzzer.
Figure 27 Watch Bridge Unit, LCD type.

handling and
defining priority.
Indicate if the
engineers safety
system is active.
Used to call on
duty officers. SYSTEM FAIL
Indicates that
the unit has
failed.
LAMP TEST
Push to check Indicates the location Used to increase SOUND OFF
that all indi- having watch or descrease Push to silence
cators are OK. responsability. text illumination. the buzzer.
Figure 28 Watch Bridge Unit, LED type.
78 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Getting started
The main difference between the two types are that the LCD type
can display individual alarm messages, while the LED type has a
larger number of alarm groups.
- The LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) type will display date and
time when no-one is ON DUTY.
- For the LED (Light Emitting Diode) type all indicators will
be dark when no-one is ON DUTY.
- The repeat alarm function is activated if an alarm is not
acknowledged within a set period of time.
2.6.2 How to adjust illumination for LED

type panels
1 Background lighting: Use the arrow buttons.
2 Front lighting: Push LAMP TEST and then use the arrow
buttons.
2.6.3 How to adjust illumination for LCD

type panels
1 Background lighting: Push LAMP TEST then SELECT

and use the arrow buttons.
2 Front lighting: Push LAMP TEST and use the arrow
buttons.
2.6.4 How to test the panel

1 Push LAMP TEST to check that the LEDs illuminate and
the buzzer sounds.
- If the LEDs remain dark or the buzzer is silent, replace the
panel. There are no field serviceable parts inside.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 79

2.7 Using the Watch Cabin Unit
2.7.1 Explanation of controls and

indicators
Two different types of Watch Cabin Units are available:
• The LCD-type has a 4 row by 40 characters display and six
alarm groups.
• The LED-type has seventeen alarm groups.
The following illustrations describes the main functionality of the
two types.
Used to SELECT alarm summary, selected Used to display

points summary or time display. TAG DETAILS.

handling and
defining priority.
SYSTEM FAIL
Indicates that
the unit has
failed.
LAMP TEST
Push to check Indicates that you Used to scroll SOUND OFF
that all indi- have been called. alarms on the Push to silence
cators are OK. display the buzzer.
Figure 29 Watch Cabin Unit, LCD type.

handling and
defining priority.
SYSTEM FAIL
Indicates that
the unit has
failed.
LAMP TEST
Push to check Indicates that you Used to increase SOUND OFF
that all indi- have been called. or descrease Push to silence
cators are OK. text illumination. the buzzer.
Figure 30 Watch Cabin Unit, LED type.
80 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Getting started
The main difference between the two types are that the LCD type
can display individual alarm messages, while the LED type has a
larger number of alarm groups.
- The LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) type will display date and
time when no-one is ON DUTY.
- For the LED (Light Emitting Diode) type all indicators will
be dark when no-one is ON DUTY.
- The repeat alarm function is activated if an alarm is not
acknowledged within a defined period of time.
2.7.2 How to respond to alarms

When an alarm condition occur the buzzer will sound and the alarm
is indicated on the Watch Cabin Unit. Do the following:
1 Push SOUND OFF.
2 Read the alarm information on the display or the text next to
the indicator.
3 Take appropriate action.
4 Check that the alarm is no longer displayed when the alarm
situation no longer exist.
2.7.3 How to adjust illumination for LED

type panels
1 Background lighting: Use the arrow buttons.
2 Front lighting: Push LAMP TEST and then use the arrow
buttons.
2.7.4 How to adjust illumination for LCD

type panels
1 Background lighting: Push LAMP TEST then SELECT

and use the arrow buttons.
2 Front lighting: Push LAMP TEST and use the arrow
buttons.
2.7.5 How to test the panel

1 Push LAMP TEST to check that the LEDs illuminate and
the buzzer sounds.
- If the LEDs remain dark or the buzzer is silent, replace the
panel. There are no field serviceable parts inside.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 81

3 ALARM AND MONITORING SYSTEM
3.1 Introduction
This chapter contains a detail descriptions of how to operate the
DataChief C20 alarm and monitoring system from the different
types of operator stations. It is intended for users already familiar
with the “Getting Started” section of this manual.
- Remote Operator Station
- Midi Operator Station
- Watch Bridge Unit
- Watch Cabin Unit
- ShipViewer
Figure 31 DataChief  C20 Operation.
82 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

3.2 Remote Operator Station
3.2.1 How to handle alarm events

When a process parameter enters an alarm state, the following
takes place:
- The alarm text with time, date and identification is printed.
- The alarm group indicator on the Operator Control Panel
starts flashing.
- The buzzer in the Operator Control Panel is activated.
- The alarm is indicated in red in the lower right corner of the
colour graphics display.
- External alarm devices such as engine room horn are
activated.
Do the following:
SOUND 1 Push the SOUND OFF button.

OFF
- This turns off the external alarm devices and the buzzer.
2 Push the flashing alarm group button.
- This display(s) the alarms on the colour graphics display in
red.
ALARM 3 Push the ALARM ACK. button.

ACK
- This changes the alarm text from red to yellow.
4 Attend to the alarm situation.
Note The last four unacknowledged alarms are always displayed on the
lower right side of the colour graphics display and may be
acknowledged without selecting group display.
3.2.2 How alarms are printed after a

black-out
Loss of ships power

The Distributed Processing Units (24 Volt DC) and the Remote
operator stations (230 Volt AC) are supported by separate
uninterruptible power supplies. The system will maintain power
for 30 minutes after a blackout. Each Distributed Processing Unit
timestamps its own alarms immediately when they occur. This
timestamping is very accurate. All alarms are sorted and printed
out according to the time they were detected.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 83

Loss of power to Remote Operator Stations

The Distributed Processing Units store all the alarm information.
If the Remote Operator Stations loose power the the system will
continue to operate, and can be monitored or controlled from the
Local Operator Stations. When power is restored to the Remote
Operator Stations all alarms are sorted and printed out according
to the time they were detected.
Loss of power to Distributed Processing units
If you loose power to the Distributed Processing Units the system
will not be working for the duration of the power interruption. All
settings are how ever retained and as soon as power is restored the
system will be up and running.
3.2.3 How to display alarm summary

This function will display all active alarms. Do the following:
ALARM
1 Push the ALARM SUMMARY button.
SUMMARY
- A summary of all active and unacknowledged alarms are
displayed on the colour graphics display.
2 Use the PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN buttons to go

backwards and forwards in the list when more than one page
exists.
3.2.4 How to display alarm history

This function displays a chronological list of alarm events. Do the
following:
ALARM
1 Push the ALARM HISTORY button.
HISTORY
- A complete chronological list of all alarm events are
displayed on the colour graphics display. The newest alarms
are displayed on top.
* Unacknowledged alarms are displayed in red.
* Acknowledged alarms are displayed in yellow.
* Cleared alarm conditions are displayed in green.

exists.
3.2.5 How to display alarm group

information
This function is used to view the tags in an alarm group. The value
and alarm limits for each tag is displayed. Do the following:
84 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

GROUP
1 Push the GROUP DISPLAY button.
DISPLAY
- The prompt Select group: is displayed in the lower left of
the colour graphics display.
2 Type in an alarm group number and push ENTER, or push

the desired alarm group button on the Operator Control
Panel.
- The group name is displayed with the tag highlighted at the
top.

exists.
3.2.6 How to display counters and reset

counters
This function is used to view running hours for pumps, main
engine, accumulated values for analogue sensors etc. The total
accumulated value and “lap” value for each tag is displayed. Do the
following:
- Requires that “Reset Counters” is enabled
→ See “How to enable resetting of counters” on page 96.
COUNTER
1 Push the COUNTER DISPLAY button.
DISPLAY
- The system counters are displayed.
2 A counter value may be changed by using the UP/DOWN

arrow keys to highlight it.
3 Push ENTER to address it.

- The prompt Enter new Counter value: is displayed in the
lower left of the colour graphics display.
4 Type in the new counter value.
5 Push ENTER.
- It is possible to reset all counters selecting Reset all
counters or Reset all lap counters.
→ See “How to display system information” on page 92.
3.2.7 How to display offscan alarms

This function is used to view tags set to offscan. The value and
alarm limit for each tag are displayed. Do the following:
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 85

GROUP 1 Push the GROUP DISPLAY button.

DISPLAY
- 2 Type in -2 (minus 2).
2
3 Push ENTER.
- Offscan tags are displayed.
4 Use the PREVIOUS PAGE and NEXT PAGE buttons to go

exists.
3.2.8 How to toggle between group and

alarm display
Do the following:
GROUP 1 Push the GROUP DISPLAY button.

DISPLAY
2 Type in a group number, or push the desired group button on
the Operator Control Panel.
3 Push ENTER
- The group name is displayed with the tag highlighted at the
top.
GROUP 4 Push the GROUP/ALARM button.

DISPLAY
- For each push of the button the display toggles between all
tags and tags in alarm state.
3.2.9 How to acknowledge alarms

Separate and group alarms can be acknowledged while a mimic-,
an alarm group- or an alarm summary display is active. There are
three ways to acknowledge alarms:
Method 1
To acknowledge up to tree of the active alarms displayed in the
lower right corner of colour graphics display do the following:
86 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003


ACK
- A maximum of three alarms are acknowledged at the same
time. Any unacknowledged alarms will replace those just
acknowledged.
Method 2
Do the following:
ALARM 1 Push the ALARM HISTORY button.

HISTORY
- The alarm history is displayed.

ACK
- A maximum of three alarms are acknowledged at the same
time. The alarm text turns yellow. When the alarm condition
returns to normal, the text turns green.
Method 3
Do the following:
ALARM 1 Push the ALARM GROUP button.

GROUP

ACK
- All active alarms shown on the colour graphics monitor are
acknowledged. If there are more unacknowledged alarms
push PAGE DOWN to acknowledge the additional alarms.
The alarm texts changes from red to yellow. When all alarms
have been acknowledged the alarm button is steady lit. When
all alarm conditions in the selected alarm group have
returned to normal, the colour graphics display is cleared.
3.2.10 How to set day, dusk or night

viewing conditions
When the Remote Operator Station is placed on the bridge or in a
similar places it is useful to set the viewing conditions for day, dusk
or night viewing. You can also turn the screen saver on/off and
adjusting the time delay before the screen saver is turned on.
Monitor Dimmer Function
MONITOR
OCP
1 Push the MONITOR OCP DISPLAY button.
DISPLAY
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 87

2 Use the UP/DOWN arrow buttons or the trackball to select

Day, Dusk/Dawn or Night.
3 Push ENTER.
1 4 Push 1.
5 Push ENTER.
- The selected viewing condition is set.
OCP Dimmer Function
6 Use the UP/DOWN arrow buttons or the trackball to select

the lamp intensity you wish to change.
7 Push ENTER.
1-7 8 Type in a number between 1 and 7.
9 Push ENTER.
- 7 will give the brightest light.
Screen Saver
10 Use the arrow buttons or the trackball to select Screen Saver
Delay.
11 Push ENTER.
- The text Enter new delay in minutes (0 to turn saver off):
is displayed on the lower left side of the colour graphics
display.
12 Type in the delay time.
13 Push ENTER.
- Maximum delay time is 60 minutes.
Note The screen saver is automatically turned of if any of the input
devices are activated or a new alarm occurs.
3.2.11 How to print a Complete log

A remote operator station can only be connected to one printer.
This printer will have a defined function:
• Alarm printer
88 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

• Log printer
If there is only one printer in the system, the printer will serve both
functions. Do the following to activate printouts:
MISC. 1 Push the MISC. LOGS button.

LOGS
2 Select Complete log using the UP/DOWN arrow buttons.
3 Push ENTER.
- The prompt Complete log (1=start, 0=abort) is displayed
in the lower left of the display.
1 4 Push 1 to select printout.
5 Push ENTER.
- The printer starts printing the log.
- Status indication for all other logs will change to BUSY.
- When the printout is completed, status indication for all logs
will go back to READY.
M/S EAGLE NORCONTROL AUTOMATION A/S DC2000

KALDNES HULL NO: 10
COMPLETE LOG 93--12--27 12:16:45 PAGE 1
Tagname Tag description Func Value Eng.unit Alarm Low Lim. High lim.
AE001 STARTING AIR LP OPEN OPEN ( , )

AE002 CHARGE AIR LP OPEN OPEN ( , )
FO001 F.O. PRESS LP OPEN OPEN ( , )
FO001 F.O. TEMP LP OPEN OPEN ( , )
LO001 L.O. PRESS LP OPEN OPEN ( , )
LO001 L.O. TEMP LP OPEN OPEN ( , )
ME001 STARTING AIR LP OPEN OPEN ( , )
ME002 CYL.1 LUBRICATION LP OPEN OPEN ( , )
Figure 32 Typical example of Complete log.
3.2.12 How to print an Alarm Summery

log
ALARM - Use the procedure for Complete Log above, but use the
SUMMARY UP/DOWN arrow buttons to select Alarm Summary.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 89

3.2.13 How to print a Level Correction log
LEVEL
- Use the procedure for Complete Log above, but use the
CORRECTION UP/DOWN arrow buttons to select Level Correction.
3.2.14 How to print a Tank log
TANK
LOG UP/DOWN arrow buttons to select Tank log.
3.2.15 How to print a Counters log
COUNTER
LOG UP/DOWN arrow buttons to select Counters log.
3.2.16 How to print an Inhibit log
INHIBIT
LOG UP/DOWN arrow buttons to select Inhibit log.
3.2.17 How to print an Offscan log
OFFSCAN
LOG UP/DOWN arrow buttons to select Offscan log.
3.2.18 How to print Group log

Do the following to activate printouts:
MISC. 1 Push the MISC. LOGS button.

LOGS
2 Select Group log using the UP/DOWN arrow buttons.
3 Push ENTER.
- The prompt Select group log: is displayed in the lower left
of the display.
4 Type in the group number.
5 Push ENTER
6 Or push one of the alarm group buttons.
7 Push ENTER.
- The printer will start printing the log.
90 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

3.2.19 How to print a Selected points log

A Selected points log can only be printed from the Remote
Operator Station fitted configured to do that.
Note Printing a Selected Points log on demand, will clear the interval
set for printing of Selected points log.
→ See “How to set interval for Selected points log” on page 111.
MISC.
LOGS
1 Push the MISC. LOGS button.
2 Select Sel. Points Log using the UP/DOWN arrow buttons.
3 Push ENTER.
- The prompt Selectlog number: is displayed in the lower left
of the display.
- The note “Selected Log Interval will be deleted” is
displayed.
4 Type in the number (between 1 and 5) of the selected points
log you wish to print.
5 Push ENTER .
- The printer starts printing the log.
3.2.20 How to stop a printout
MISC.
LOGS
1 Push the MISC. LOGS button.
2 Select the log you want to stop using the UP/DOWN arrow
buttons.
3 Push ENTER.
0 4 Push 0 to stop the printout.

- The printing stops when the printer buffer is empty.
Printer responsible parameters
- These parameters indicates which Remote Operator Station
is responsible for printing alarms and logs.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 91

Printer set-up parameters

- A list of current printer settings, such as printer type and
form feed length. The later is useful when ordering printer
paper. These parameters are normally set during
commissioning.
3.2.21 How to display system information

This function is used to display various system information such
as ship and station information, software version, functions,
limited access override etc. and allows further access to displaying
and controlling system parameters. Do the following:
SYSTEM 1 Push the SYSTEM INFO DISPLAY button.

INFO
DISPLAY
- The system information display is shown on the colour
graphics display.
3.2.22 About password access
SYSTEM An access control system limits the possibilities to acknowledge

INFO
DISPLAY alarms and change system parameters or information. The status
of this system is available by pushing System Information
Display.
Figure 33 System Information Display.
92 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

The access control system is based on the use of passwords. The

following password levels are available:
- Acknowledge: Allows acknowledging of alarms. Used to
receive and acknowledge alarms from Remote Operator
Stations that normally wouldn’t receive them, such as on the
bridge. When typing in the password you can also set the
expiration time.The password expiration time can be set to
any number of minutes. When set to 0 the password will not
automatically expire. Push the Release Access button in Tag
Details or change the status to NO in the System
Configuration Display.
- Mimic: Allows system control through the mimic pictures.
Used to control (start, stop, open, close, etc.) components
you normally don’t have access to, such as for instance
operating the power management from the cargo control
room. The password expiration time can be set to any
number of minutes. When set to 0 the password will not
automatically expire. Push the Release Access button in Tag
Details or change the status to NO in the System
Configuration Display.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 93

Figure 34 Password window.
- Commissioning: Allows changing of alarm limits, alarm

delays, event limits, tag description, alarm groups,
enabling/disabling of alarms and the system access for each
Remote Operator Station. Access automatically expire after
30 minutes or when pushing the Release Access button in
Tag Details.
- Superuser: Allows changing of alarm limits, alarm delays,
event limits and enabling/disabling of alarms. Access
automatically expire after 30 minutes or when pushing the
Release Access button in Tag Details.
- Password: Allows changing of alarm limits, alarm delays
and event limits. This password does not automatically
expire. Push the Release Access button in Tag Details or
change the status to NO in the System Configuration
Display.
- Yes: In the System Configuration Display indicates that
access at this level is available.
- No: In the System Configuration Display indicates that
access at this level is not available.
Note Do not leave the system with a high password access as this allows
unauthorized access to vital system functions.
If you try to make changes without having inserted the right
password the system will automatically request it.
3.2.23 How to display Distributed

Processing Unit information
This procedure allows display of all parameters for each tag such
as values , alarm status, alarm limits etc. Do the following:

INFO
DISPLAY - The system information display is shown on the colour
graphics display.
94 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

2 Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the text after Unit
display.
3 Push ENTER.
- The prompt Enter unit number: is displayed on the lower
left side of the colour graphics display.
4 Type in the number of the DPU.
5 Push ENTER.
- The information about the selected processing unit is
displayed.
6 Use NEXT PAGE or PREVIOUS PAGE buttons to select

the next or previous Distributed Processing Unit.
3.2.24 Info field enable

- This parameter is for Kongsberg Maritime Ship Systems use
only.
3.2.25 How to enable changing of Eng.

unit/counts

INFO
graphics display.
2 Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the text after Eng.
unit change.
3 Push ENTER.
- The prompt Eng.unit counts/change enable (1=on, 0=off):
is displayed at the lower left side of the colour graphics
display.
1 4 Type 1.
5 Push ENTER to enable changing of Eng.unit/counts.

→ Refer to page 117 for information on “How to change tag
parameters for an analogue channel” and page 120 for
information on “How to change tag parameters for a digital
channel”.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 95

3.2.26 How to enable resetting of

counters
This function is used to reset counters for running hours for pumps,
main engine, accumulated values for analogue sensors etc.
SYSTEM
1 Push the SYSTEM INFO DISPLAY button.
INFO
graphics display.
2 Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the text after Reset
counters.
3 Push ENTER.
- The prompt Reset all counter enable (1=on, 0=off): is
displayed at the lower left side of the colour graphics display.
1 4 Type 1 .
5 Push ENTER to enable resetting of all counters in the

COUNTERS DISPLAY.
→ Refer to “How to display and reset counters” on page 85 for
more information.
3.2.27 How to override limitations to

acknowledge alarms
This function allows acknowledging of alarms from Remote
Operator Stations which would not normally allow it.
SYSTEM
1 Push the SYSTEM INFO DISPLAY button.
INFO
graphics display.
2 Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the text after

Acknowledge.
3 Push ENTER.
- The prompt Enter acknowledge limit. override password:
is displayed at the lower left side of the colour graphics
display.
4 Type in the password.
5 Push ENTER.
- The text Acknowledge limitation override enabled is
displayed in the function window.
- You may now acknowledge alarms from this Remote
Operator Station.
96 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Note The text ACCESS OVERRIDE ACK will be displayed in the status
area until the override is reset, refer page 65.
3.2.28 How to override limitations to

control pumps and valves
This function allows controlling of pumps and valves from Remote
Operator Stations which would not normally allow it.

INFO
graphics display.

Mimic.
3 Push ENTER.
- The prompt Enter mimic limit. override password: is
5 Push ENTER.
- The text Mimic access override enabled is displayed.
- You may now control pumps and valves from this Remote
Operator Station.
Note The text ACCESS OVERRIDE MIM will be displayed in the
status area until the override is reset, refer page 65.
3.2.29 How to silence the Operator

Control Panel buzzer

INFO
graphics display.
2 Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the text after OCP
Buzzer silent.
3 Push ENTER.
- The prompt Enter OCP Buzzer disable password: is
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 97

5 Push ENTER.
- The Operator Control Panel (OCP) buzzer is now disabled.
Note The text ACCESS OVERRIDE BUZ will be displayed in the status
area until the disabling is turned off, refer page 65.
3.2.30 How to set tags to offscan

→ Refer to page 117 How to change parameters for an analogue
channel or page 120 for How to change parameters for a digital
channel.
3.2.31 How to change alarm limits

channel.
3.2.32 How to change alarm delay

channel.
3.2.33 How to access the Watch Calling

configuration
This function allows configuration of the Watch Calling System.

INFO
DISPLAY
- The system information display is shown on the colour
graphics display.

Configuration Menu.
3 Push ENTER.
- The prompt Enter 1 to Configure Watch Call: is displayed
at the lower left side of the colour graphics display.
1 4 Type 1.
5 Push ENTER.
- The Watch Calling configuration pages are displayed.
98 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

6 Use the use the NEXT PAGE and PREVIOUS PAGE

buttons to go between the pages.
3.2.34 How to set the On Duty engineer

The engineer to be assigned to On Duty must have qualifications
that comply with the on duty assignment. The system verifies each
duty assignment by checking the engineer qualifications table. A
message will appear on the screen if the engineer is not qualified
for the assigned duty. The following example shows the procedure
for selecting an engineer:
Officer On Duty
Officer Qual.Duty
f Chief Engineer E N
f 1st Engineer E E
f 2nd Engineer E N
f 3rd Engineer N N
f Chief Cargo M N
f 1st Cargo C C
Figure 35 On Duty engineer including qualifications.

Explanation to the abbreviations:
* E - Engine duty
* C - Cargo duty
* M - Multipurpose duty
* N - No qualifications
- This procedure requires that the system is in “engine control
room watch”.
1 Use the procedure as described in “How to access the Watch
Calling configuration“ on page 98.
2 Use the NEXT PAGE and PREVIOUS PAGE buttons to go

between the pages.
3 Use the TRACKBALL and the READ button to select the

On Duty engineer.
4 Push ENTER.
- The prompt Officer on Engine duty (1=Engine duty): is
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 99

1 5 Type 1.
6 Push ENTER.
- The engineer On Duty has been set - the indicator turns
green.
3.2.35 How to select the Watch

Responsible location
Note This procedure requires that an engineer is set to on duty. Refer to
“How to set the On Duty engineer“ above.
The engine control room is the default Watch Responsible
location. Use the following procedure to select an alternative
Watch Responsible location. This can be done in the following
three ways:
On the Operator Control Panel

1 Push the button for the watch responsible location you want
(BRIDGE WATCH, ENG WATCH).
- The indicator for the new location will flash until accepted
at that location, for example the Watch Bridge Unit panel on
the bridge.
- The indicator will be steady lit when the watch responsibility
has been accepted. The indicator for the previous location is
switched off - not lit.
On the Watch Bridge Unit

1 Push the button for the watch responsible location you want
(BRIDGE WATCH, ENG WATCH buttons).
at that location, for example the Remote Operator Station in
the engine control room.
On the Remote operator station display


between the pages.
100 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003


Watch Responsibility Area.
Responsibility
f Bridge Watch
F Engine CR Watch
Figure 36 Watch responsibility location before change.
4 Push ENTER.
- The prompt Activate operation (1=active): is displayed at
the lower left side of the colour graphics display.
1 5 Type 1.
6 Push ENTER.
Responsibility
F Bridge Watch
f Engine CR Watch
Figure 37 Watch responsibility location after change.

at that location, for example the Watch Bridge Unit panel on
the bridge.
3.2.36 How to call the On Duty engineer

or All engineers
From the Remote Operator Station, you can call the On Duty
engineers, or All engineers with engine or cargo qualifications, or
with engine and cargo (multipurpose qualifications). The
following is an example for calling all qualified engineers (Call All
Engine) and for calling the On Duty engineers (Call Engine Duty)
Individual ship configurations may vary. This can be done in the
following three ways:
On the Operator Control Panel
CALL 1 Push the CALL DUTY ENG. or CALL ALL ENG. button.
DUTY
ENG. - The call indicator will be lit and the selected engineer called.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 101

CALL
ALL 2 To cancel the call push the button again.
ENG.
On the Watch Bridge Unit
CALL 1 Push the CALL DUTY ENG. or CALL ALL ENG. button.
DUTY
ENG. - The call indicator will be lit and the selected engineer called.
CALL
ALL
2 To cancel the call push the button again.
ENG.
On the Remote operator station display


between the pages.

engineers to call.
Calling officers
f Calling Engine Duty
f Calling Cargo Duty
F Calling All Engine
f Calling All Cargo
Figure 38 Calls all engine qualified officers.
Calling officers
F Calling Engine Duty
f Calling Cargo Duty
f Calling All Engine
f Calling All Cargo
Figure 39 Calls the On Duty engineer.
4 Push ENTER.
- The prompt Activate call (1=Activate): is displayed at the
lower left side of the colour graphics display.
1 5 Type 1.
102 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

6 Push ENTER.
- The call indicator will be lit and the selected engineer called.
7 To cancel the call repeat the procedure selecting CANCEL
CALL (0=cancel):.
3.2.37 How to define the engineer

qualifications
When a new engineer reports aboard with qualifications different
from the engineer being replaced, the qualifications table needs to
be updated. The following example shows a qualification change
for the the 3rd engineer:
Officers Qualifications
Officers Qualifications
Chief Engineer Engine

1st Engineer Engine
2nd Engineer Engine
3rd Engineer Engine
Chief Officer Multipurpose
1st Officer Cargo
Figure 40 The qualification section checks that the On Duty

engineer is qualified for the assigned duty.

between the pages.

qualifications for the engineer.
4 Push ENTER.
- The prompt Enter qual (0=None, 1=Engine, 2=Cargo,
3=Multipurpose): is displayed at the lower left side of the
5 Type the relevant number.
6 Push ENTER.
- The new qualifications have been set.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 103

3.2.38 How to define watch calling

Off-Duty mode
When an engineer or group of engineers are on duty the Watch
Bridge and Watch Cabin units are automatically set to On Duty
mode. When an engineer is Off Duty “his/her” panel(s) can be
defined as either “active” or “passive”:
What is Off Duty active

The panels will not sound an alarm but will continue to display
alarm information. Unacknowledged alarms will have an ”*” in
front.
What is Off Duty passive

The panels will not sound an alarm. LCD-type panels will display
“date and time” information only. Pushing the controls on a
LCD-type panel will display the alarms. Unacknowledged alarms
will have an ”*” in front. (The LEDs on the LED-type panels will
remain dark).
Calling configuration” on page 98.

between the pages.

engineer.
4 Push ENTER.
- The prompt Enter panel(s) mode(1=Active, 0=Passive): is
6 Push ENTER.
- The new Off-Duty mode have been set.
104 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Off-Duty Panel Mode
Officers Mode
Chief Engineer Active

1st Engineer Passive
2nd Engineer Passive
3rd Engineer Passive
Chief Officer Passive
1st Officer Passive
Figure 41 engineers Off-Duty panel mode.
3.2.39 How to define Watch Calling panel

groups for on duty engineers
Each On Duty engineer has a group of panels defined as
“belonging” to that engineer-position. These are the panels in
his/her cabin, office and in public areas. When an engineer is On
duty, each of these panels are in On Duty active mode. Since each
ships configuration is different the illustration may differ from
your system.
Note This configuration can only be done at the master Remote
Operator Station.
Calling configuration” on page 98.

between the pages.

panel group (Chief Engineer, 1st Engineer etc.).
4 Push ENTER.
- The prompt Enter Group number to assign panel to: is
6 Push ENTER.
7 Type in the group number.
8 Push ENTER.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 105

KONGSBERG Date
WATCH CALLING CONFIGURATION 1 of 2 Time
Panel Configuration This column lists the time and

date of change for each panel
Panel S/N Group Mode Last Change
00000000000001 Chief Engineer Operational 11:07:41 08/11--2001
00000000000002 1st Engineer Operational 12:00:00 12/12--2001
00000000000003 2nd Engineer Connecting 02:03:00 06/10--2001
00000000000004 3rd Engineer Operational 10:10:23 07/10--2001
00000000000005 Chief Officer Operational 10:22:09 07/10--2001
00000000000006 1st Officer Operational 10:28:34 07/10--2001
00000000000007 Public Operational 10:32:27 07/10--2001
00000000000008 Public Operational 10:44:12 07/10--2001
00000000000009 Public Operational 10/56:02 07/10--2001
Groups
Each panel has a unique serial number. Each panel can be
defined to a ”group” so that all alarms to the ”On Duty” 1. Public
officer are sent to all panels defined for the position, and to 2. Chief Engineer
public areas. 3. 1st Engineer
For example, all panels defined as ”Chief Engineer”
4. 2nd Engineer
will be active when the Chief Engineer is ”On Duty”. 5. 3rd Engineer
6. Chief Officer
7. 1st Officer
Apply Changes
Message area which tells you the codes to choose the selection.
Figure 42 One of the Watch Calling configuration pages.
9 Place the cursor on the display area APPLY CHANGES and

push the READ button.
- The change is now selected.
1 10 To apply the change push 1.
11 Push ENTER.
Groups
1. Public
2. Chief Engineer
3. 1st Engineer
4. 2nd Engineer
5. 3rd Engineer
6. Chief Officer
7. 1st Officer
Figure 43 Available Watch Cabin Unit groups.
106 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Panel Configuration
Panel S/N Group
00000000000001 Chief Engineer

00000000000002 1st Engineer
00000000000003 2nd Engineer
00000000000004 3rd Engineer
00000000000005 Chief Officer
00000000000006 1st Officer
00000000000007 Public
00000000000008 Public
00000000000009 Public
Figure 44 Panel serial numbers and group assignment.
3.2.40 How to change time zone

Used to change time zone when sailing eastward or westward.

INFO
graphics display.

Timezone.
3 Push ENTER.
- The prompt Enter password: is displayed in the function
window at the lower left side of the colour graphics display.
5 Push ENTER.
- The following dialogue is displayed.
6 Select the new time zone and push OK.

Note If the system is fitted with a master clock, all time changes must be
made there.
3.2.41 How to change system time

Note Use the “change time zone” function above when going between
different time zones. The DataChief  C20 system time is set to
Coordinated Universal Time (UTC formerly known as GMT), and
only minor corrections such as if the time is not quite correct should
be made here!
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 107

Figure 45 Change Time zone dialogue box.

INFO
graphics display.

Change system time.
3 Push ENTER.
- The prompt Enter password: is displayed at the lower left
side of the colour graphics display.
5 Push ENTER.
- The following dialogue is displayed.
Figure 46 Set system time dialogue box.
108 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

6 Type in the local date and time and push OK.

- The new date and time is transferred to the other Remote
Operator Stations in the network if the Remote Operator
Station you are working at is set up to transfer this data.
7 Select the time zone and push OK.
Note If the system is fitted with a master clock, all time changes must be
made there.
3.2.42 How to make your own list of

selected tags
The system allows you to create up to five display pages containing
your own selection of tags. Each page can include up to 20 tags.
Tags can be combined from different alarm groups. Do the
following:
SELECTED 1 Push the SELECTED POINTS DISPLAY button.

POINTS
DISPLAY - In the function window in the lower left corner of the colour
graphics display the text Log no. is shown.
1-5 2 Enter a number between 1 and 5.

Note If you want to create a new display the number should not
previously have been used to create a selected points display!
- The texts ADD, DELETE and EXIT will be displayed at the
top of the screen.
3 Use the LEFT/RIGHT arrow buttons to highlight ADD.
4 Push ENTER.
- The text Select group: will be displayed in bottom left of the
5 Push the alarm group buttons to you wish to select tags from
or enter the alarm group number.
6 Push ENTER.
- The tags in the selected alarm group are displayed on the
right side of the colour graphics display.
7 Use the arrow buttons to highlight the tags you want.
8 Push ENTER to select it.

- The selected tag is displayed on the left side of the colour
graphics display.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 109

9 If the tag list fills more than one page use the NEXT PAGE
and PREVIOUS PAGE buttons to go between them.
10 To select an other tag from the same alarm group go to 5. To
select a tag from a different alarm group go to 3.
11 Should you want to remove a tag from your list use the arrow
buttons to highlight DELETE.
12 Push ENTER.
13 Use the arrow buttons to select the tag you want to remove.
14 Push ENTER.
- The tag is removed from the list.
15 Use the arrow buttons to highlight EXIT.
16 Push ENTER.
- Your list of selected tags is shown with values and limits.
3.2.43 How to change a list of selected

tags
Your list of selected tags can be modified at any time. Remember
there is a maximum of 20 tags per list. Do the following:

POINTS
DISPLAY - In the lower left corner of the colour graphics display the text
Select log number: is shown.
2 Enter the number of the selected tags list you want to change
(between 1 and 5).
3 Use the TRACKBALL and the READ button to select

CONFIG in the lower right corner.
top of the screen.
4 Use the LEFT/RIGHT arrow button to highlight ADD if
you want to add tags and push ENTER. If you want to
DELETE tags go to 9.
- The text Select group: will be displayed in bottom left of the
5 Push one of the alarm group buttons to you wish to select tags
from.
110 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003


- The tag is displayed on the left side of the colour graphics
display.
- To select an other tag from the same alarm group go to 6. To
10 Push ENTER.
12 Push ENTER.
14 Push ENTER.
- Your updated list of tags will be displayed with values and
limits.
3.2.44 How to set the interval for

selected points log
Note A Selected points log can only be printed from the Remote
Operator Station configured to print this log.

POINTS
1-5 2 Enter the number of the selected tags list you want to log
(between 1 and 5).
3 Use the TRACKBALL and the READ button to select

CONFIG in the lower right corner.
- The texts ADD, DELETE ,EXIT and INTERVAL will be
displayed at the top of the screen.
4 Use the LEFT/RIGHT arrow button to highlight
INTERVAL.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 111

5 Push ENTER.
- The text Enter log printout interval (hh.mm): will be
displayed in bottom left of the colour graphics display.
6 Type in the print interval using the specified format (hh.mm)

and push ENTER.
7 Push the SPACE button and ENTER when you want to

remove the interval.
3.2.45 How to make your own trend

display
The system allows you to create up to five different trend log
displays containing your own selection of tags. Each display can
include up to eight tags. Tags can be combined from different
alarm groups. The trend log displays input as curves as a function
of time. Do the following:
SELECTED 1 Push the SELECT TREND DISPLAY button.

TRENDS

Note The number should not previously have been used to create a trend
display!
top of the screen.
3 Use the LEFT/RIGHT arrow button to highlight ADD.
4 Push ENTER.
- The text Select group: will be displayed in the bottom left
of the colour graphics display.
from or enter the alarm group number.
6 Push ENTER.
112 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003


display.
12 Push ENTER.
14 Push ENTER.
16 Push ENTER.
- Your trend display of selected tags will be displayed.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 113

Figure 47 Typical trend log display.
Explanation to the trendlog display

• Selected trend tags: Up to eight trend tags can be monitored
simultaneously. These are displayed in different colours with
their current value. Use the TRACKBALL and the READ key
to select one of the tags. The value scale will then be displayed
in the actual unit (temp, pressure, etc.)for that tag, using trend
low and high range as minimum and maximum values. To select
tags see “How to make your own trend display” above.
• Value scale: Normally 0 to 100% - white scale. When selecting
one of the trend tags (see Selected trend tags) the scale will be
displayed in the same colour as that tag, and will be scaled in the
unit for that tag.
- Trend low range: The minimum value for the value scale.
Used when selecting one of the trend tags (see Selected trend
tags). Use the TRACKBALL and the READ key to select
it and type in a new value.
- Trend high range: The maximum value for the value scale.
Used when selecting one of the trend tags (see Selected trend
tags). Use the TRACKBALL and the READ key to select
it and type in a new value.
• Time scale: The selected time scale for the trend display.
114 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

• Time span: You can vary the time span of the trend display
between 6 minutes and 120 hours. Push the button so that the
current time span is displayed and use the UP/DOWN arrow
keys to change it.
• Grid: Pushing the button turns the grid on/off.
• Stop: Pushing the button freezes the trend display (no new
samples are added). Use the LEFT/RIGHT arrow keys to
move the trend cursor along the time scale. The value for each
tag will be displayed as the cursor moves along the time scale.
• Config: Push this button to add or delete trend tags. See “How
to make your own trend display” above.
3.2.46 How to make your own bargraph

display
The system allows you to create up to five different bargraph
displays containing your own selection of tags. Each display can
include up to six tags. Tags can be combined from different alarm
groups. Do the following:
SELECT 1 Push the SELECT BARGR. DISPLAY button.

BARGR.
DISPLAY
- In the lower left corner of the colour graphics display the text

Note The number should not previously have been used to create a
bargraph display!
top of the screen.
3 Use the LEFT/RIGHT arrow buttons to highlight ADD.
4 Push ENTER.
from or enter the alarm group number.
6 Push ENTER.
7 Use the arrow buttons to highlight the tags you want .
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 115


display.
12 Push ENTER.
14 Push ENTER.
16 Push ENTER.
- Your bargraph display of selected tags will be displayed.
Figure 48 Typical bargraph display.
Explanation to the bargraph display

• Selected bargraph tags: Up to six tags can be displayed
simultaneously. These are displayed with their current value. To
select tags see “How to make your own trend display” above.
116 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

• Tag number: The tag number for the selected tag.

• Scale: Bargraph scale
- Bargraph high range: The maximum value for the scale.
Use the TRACKBALL and the READ key to select it and
type in a new maximum value.
- Bargraph low range: The minimum value for the scale. Use
the TRACKBALL and the READ key to select it and type
in a new minimum value.
• Current value bar: The value of the tag displayed as a
bargraph.
• Current value: The current value of the tag. The numbers are
displayed in green when the value is inside the limits and red
when outside.
• Limits bar: Displays the minimum and maximum alarm limits
- if any.
• Maximum alarm limit: The bar is green above this limit and
red below.
• Minimum alarm limit: The bar is red above this limit and
green below.
• Config: Push this button to add or delete bargraph tags. See
“How to make your own bargraph display” above.
3.2.47 How to change tag parameters for

an analogue channel
This function is used to inspect and adjust parameters for analogue
measuring points.

GROUP
DISPLAY

one of the alarm group buttons to you wish to select tags
from.
- The alarm group is displayed on the colour graphics display.
3 Use the UP/DOWN arrow buttons to select a tag.
4 Push the TAG DETAILS button.

TAG
DETAILS
- The parameters for that tag is displayed.
5 There are three buttons at the bottom of the window. Push

them to display the following:
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 117

Figure 49 Tag detail display.

* Tag Details: Shows the normal tag details display. All
parameters displayed here can be changed by the
operator. Pushing the Offscan Enable stops checking this
tag against alarm limits. Pushing the Offscan Disable
starts checking this tag against alarm limits. Pushing
Offscan Value allows you to to insert a simulated value
when the tag is off scan. This may be used while waiting
to replace a defective sensor.
* Advanced Tag Details: Shows a full list of all tag details.
All parameters displayed in bold characters can be
changed by the user without a password. Use the
Parameter Filter on the right side to reduce the number
of parameters displayed.
* Tag application: Lists other tags related to this tag. Only
used for advanced applications and system
commissioning.
6 To change a variable point to it ,and push the READ button

on the operator control panel.
7 Type in the new value and push OK.
- The display picture is updated and the new value is
transferred to the Distributed Processing Unit and any other
Remote Operator Station in the system.
The following table explains what the the different parameters for
analogue input tags are used for.
Parameter Type Adjust- Function
name able
Tag name Text Yes Unique code describing a tag
Tag number Number No Unique number describing a tag
Description Text Yes Description of a tag
Function Text No Short code describing the function of
the tag
118 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003


name able
Value Number No Measured value scaled to technical
value and Filtered
Distributed Pro- Number No Unique number of the node
cessing Unit
number
Channel number Number No Number of the channel connected
Channel Type Channel type is the specification of how
the input signal is handled and scaled
Operator Control Number No All tags in the system are divided into
Panel alarm different groups.
group
Bridge group Number No All tags going to the external alarm sys-
tem are divided into different groups.
Autolog Number Yes Included in the autolog list
Noonlog Number Yes Included in the noonlog list
Eventlog Number Yes Included in the eventlog list
Offscan Number Yes Included in the offscan log list
Offscan value Number Yes Included in the offscan log list
Inhibited by tag Text No Tag to inhibit this channel
Access group Number Yes Limited access id. to acknowledge this
alarm
Limit Alarm Low Number Yes Alarm limit
Low
Limit Alarm High Number Yes Alarm limit
High
Limit Event Low Number Yes Event limit
Low
Limit Event High Number Yes Event limit
High
Filter Time *) Number Yes Time in 100 milliseconds
Dynamic Dead Number Yes Report value dead band limit
Band *)
Counts Low *) Number Yes A/D minimum value
Counts High *) Number Yes A/D maximum value
Eng.Units Low *) Number Yes Instrument minimum value
Eng.Units High Number Yes Instruments maximum value
*)
Alarm On Number Yes High/ Low delay in 1 second
Delay1
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 119


name able
Alarm Off Number Yes High/ Low delay in 1 second
Delay1
Alarm On Number Yes HighHigh/LowLow delay in 1 second
Delay2
Alarm Off Number Yes HighHigh/LowLow delay in 1 second
Delay2
Inhibit On Delay Number Yes Inhibit delay in 1 second
Inhibit Off Delay Number Yes Inhibit delay in 1 second
Table 2 Analogue input channel parameters.
*) Requires Eng.Unit change = 1 in System info. display.
3.2.48 How to change tag parameters for

a digital channel
This function is used to inspect and adjust parameters for digital
measuring points.

GROUP
DISPLAY

one of the alarm group buttons to you wish to select tags
from.
- The alarm group is displayed on the colour graphics display.
3 Use the UP/DOWN arrow buttons to select a tag.
4 Push the TAG DETAILS button.

TAG
DETAILS
- The parameters for that tag is displayed.
5 Use the arrow buttons to select the parameter you wish to
change and push enter.
6 Select for instance High-High alarm limit.
7 Push ENTER.
- The text Enter new limit: will be displayed on the lower left
side of the colour graphics display.
8 Enter a new limit.
9 Push ENTER.
- The display picture is updated and the new value is
transferred to the Distributed Processing Unit.
120 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

digital input tags are used for.
Name able
Tag name Text No Unique code describing a tag
Description Text No Description of a tag
the tag
State Text No Input status after time delay
cessing Unit
number
group
alarm
Enable Event on Yes/No Yes Enable/ disable event
Open
Closed
Alarm On Delay Number Yes Delay in 1 second
Alarm Off Delay Number Yes Delay in 1 second
Signal Cond. On Number Yes Delay of signal before handled by alarm
Delay system in 1 second
Signal Cond Off Number Yes Delay of signal before handled by alarm
Signal Cond In- Yes/No Yes Invert input status
vert
Table 3 Digital input channel parameters.
3.2.49 How to change the Autolog

The Autolog function is used to print logs a set intervals.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 121

Altering autolog printing time
AUTO 1 Push the AUTO LOG CONFIG. button.

LOG
CONFIG.
2 Use the UP/DOWN arrow buttons to highlight the time,
3 Push ENTER.
- The prompt Enter new time hh.mm: is displayed in the
lower left of the display.
4 Type in the new time.
5 Push ENTER.
- The colour graphics display is updated with the new time.
M/S EAGLE NORCONTROL AUTOMATION A/S DC2000

KALDNES HULL NO: 10
AUTO LOG 93--12--27 12:16:58 PAGE 1
Tagname Tag description Func Value Eng.unit Alarm Low Lim. High lim.
AE001 STARTING AIR LP 24.5 KG/CM2 ( 18.00, )

AE002 CHARGE AIR LP OPEN OPEN ( , )
FO001 F.O. PRESS LP OPEN OPEN ( , )
FO001 F.O. TEMP LP OPEN OPEN ( , )
LO001 L.O. PRESS LP OPEN OPEN ( , )
LO001 L.O. TEMP LP OPEN OPEN ( , )
ME001 STARTING AIR LP OPEN OPEN ( , )
Table 4 Typical example of an Auto log.
Deleting an autolog printing time
AUTO 1 Push the AUTO LOG CONFIG button.

LOG
CONFIG. 2 Use the arrow buttons to highlight the start time to be
deleted.
3 Push ENTER.
- The prompt Enter new time hh.mm: is displayed in the
4 Push the SPACE button and then ENTER.
- The selected start time is deleted.
122 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Starting and stopping Autolog
AUTO 1 Push the AUTO LOG CONFIG button.

LOG
CONFIG.
2 Use the arrow buttons to highlight Autolog on/off.
3 Push ENTER.
- The prompt Autolog on/off (1-on, 0-off) is displayed in the
4 A prompt will occur at the bottom left of the screen: “on=1
off=0”.
1 5 Type in 1.
6 Push ENTER to turn autolog on, or type in 0 and push

ENTER to turn autolog off.
3.2.50 How to change Deviation

parameters
How to change limits

This function is used to set limits for alarm blocking and deviation
from corrected value such as used for main engine exhaust gas
temperature.
DEVIATION 1 Push the DEVIATION PARAM. CONFIG. button.

PARAM.
CONFIG.
2 Use the UP/DOWN arrow buttons to highlight the

parameter you want to change, for instance the limit for
alarm blocking.
3 Push ENTER.
- The prompt Enter new value: is displayed in the lower left
of the display.
4 Type in the new value.
5 Push ENTER.
- The new value is displayed.
- Use this procedure to change any value on this display.
Note When the average temperature is below a preset value, the
deviation alarm is blocked.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 123

Figure 50 Typical Deviation parameter configuration display,

your display may differ.
How to make profile correction

The average cylinder temperature is used as reference for
deviations. For this reason it is necessary to correct the temperature
of each cylinder, to get the same temperature in all cylinders as
reference. This correction is done when running the engine at full
load and can be done in two ways:
Automatic correction
DEVIATION
PARAM.
CONFIG.
1 Push the DEVIATION PARAM. CONFIG. button.
2 Use the TRACKBALL and READ button to highlight the

text Auto after “Profile correction”.
3 Push ENTER.
- All values found for “Current deviation:” are moved to
“Correction:” and “Current deviation:” should read “0” for
all cylinders.
Manual correction
DEVIATION
PARAM.
CONFIG.
1 Push the DEVIATION PARAM. CONFIG. button.

text Man after “Profile correction”.
124 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003


value for each cylinder after the text “Correction”. Type in
the value for each cylinder one by one.
- The value for each cylinder under “Current deviation:”
should read “0”.
→ For information about ”Exhaust mean value tag items” refer to
page 224.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 125

3.3 Midi Operator Station
3.3.1 How to handle alarm events

When a process parameter enters an alarm state, the following
takes place:
- The buzzer is activated.
- The alarm is indicated in red at the bottom of the display.
- External alarm devices such as engine room horns are
activated.
- The last unacknowledged alarm is displayed in red at the
bottom of the display.
Do the following:
1 Push to turn any audible alarm off.

- This turns off the buzzer and any external alarm devices.
ACK 2 Push the ACK button.

- This acknowledges the alarm displayed at the bottom of the
display (the last alarm).
- This alarm text disappears.
ACK 3 Push the ACK button again to acknowledge the next to last
alarm and so on untill no alarms are unacknowledged.
4 Attend to the alarm situation.
3.3.2 How to display alarm history
Figure 51 Typical alarm history display.
MENU 1 Push Menu to display the main menu. From some display
pictures it may be required to push Menu twice before the
main menu is displayed.
126 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

1 2 Push 1 to display the Alarm Menu.
1 3 Push 1 to display the Alarm History.
4 Use the Page down and Page up buttons to step through all
alarms a page at a time.
ENTER 5 Push Enter to display alarm details.
2 3 Push 2 to display the Alarm Summary.
alarms a page at a time.
3.3.4 How to display alarm group

information
3 3 Push 3 to display the Alarm History.
4 Use the Navigator key to select an alarm group.
ENTER 5 Push Enter.
6 Use the right and left side of the navigator key to display all
available information for each tag group.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 127

3.3.5 How to set the keyboard and

screen configuration
6 2 Push 6 to display the Configuration Menu.
2 3 Push 2 to display parameters for Keyboard and Screen.
4 Use the top and bottom of the Navigator key to select the
item you want to change.
Keyboard light and screen backlight
5 Use the Page down and Page up buttons to set the new
value.
ENTER 6 Push Enter.
Keyboard click
ENTER 7 Push Enter.
8 Use the top and bottom of the Navigator key to select On

or Off.
ENTER 9 Push Enter.
3.3.6 How to change access level

An access control system limits the possibilities to acknowledge
alarms and change system parameters or information. The status
of this system is available as follows:
6 2 Push 6 to display the Configuration menu.
128 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

1 3 Push 1 to go to User Access.

- The user access levels are displayed.
* On: Indicates that access at this level is possible.
* Off: Indicates that access at this level is not possible.
Note Only one user access level can be selected at a time.
The access control system is based on the use of passwords. The
following access levels are available:
- Monitoring: Only for viewing information.
- User: Allows system control through the mimic pictures.
Used to control (start, stop, open, close, etc.) components
you normally don’t have access to, such as for instance
operating the power management from the cargo control
room.
- Superuser: Allows changing of alarm limits, alarm delays,
event limits and enabling/disabling of alarms. Access
automatically expire after 30 minutes.
- Commissioning: Allows changing of alarm limits, alarm
delays, event limits, tag description, alarm groups,
enabling/disabling of alarms and the system access for each
Remote Operator Station. Access automatically expire after
30 minutes.
Note Do not leave the system with a high password access as this allows
unauthorized access to vital system functions.
Note If you try to make changes without having inserted the right
3.3.7 How to display information about

DPUs, tags and tag details
Distributed processing units are often abbreviated DPU’s.
2 2 Push 2 to display the DPU Overview.
DPU’s a page at a time.
4 Use the top and bottom of the navigator key to step through
each DPU one at a time.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 129

ENTER 5 For information about the tags for a particular DPU, select
the DPU and push Enter.
6 Use the right and left side of the navigator key to display all
available information for each tag.
Tag details view
ENTER 7 Push Enter to display the parameters for a particular tag -

Tag Details View.
Figure 52 Tag details display.
Tag menu
MENU 8 Push Menu.

9 The Tag Menu is displayed.
- This menu allows you to display various information about
each tag as follows:
1 10 Push 1 to display the parameters for this particular tag - Tag

Details View.
2 11 Push 2 to display a mimic picture for this tag. Use the

function keys to operate the the tag when available.
4 12 Push 3 to display the Alarm status for this tag (if any).
3.3.8 How to change tag parameters

This function is used to inspect and adjust parameters for analogue
and digital measuring points.
130 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

2 2 Push 2 to display the DPU Overview.
3 Use the Page down and Page up buttons to select the

distributed processing unit.
4 Use the top and bottom of the navigator key to select the
distributed processing unit you want.
ENTER 5 Push Enter.
6 Use the top and bottom of the navigator key to display all
available tags for the distributed processing unit.
ENTER 7 Push Enter to display the parameters for the selected tag.
8 Use the top and bottom of the navigator key to select the
parameter you want to change.
- Colours are used to indicate if the current access level allows
a parameter to be changed:
* Grey parameter text: Can not be changed at current
access level setting.
* Black parameter text: Parameter can be changed.
Note If you try to make changes without having inserted the right
ENTER 9 Push Enter.

- A parameter entry window is displayed.
CLR 10 Clear the existing value using the Clr button.
0-9 11 Type in the new value.
Note A red text indicates that you have typed in an illegal

ESC
value. If you make an error push Esc to cancel the
input.
ENTER 12 Push Enter.

- The new value is inserted. The display picture is updated and
the new value is transferred to the Distributed Processing
Unit and other Remote- and Midi Operator Stations in the
system.
Analogue input tag parameters
analogue input tags are used for.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 131


name able
Tag number Number No Unique number describing a tag
Description Text Yes Description of a tag
cessing Unit
number
group
Offscan value Number Yes Included in the offscan log list
alarm
Low
High
Low
High
Filter Time Number Yes Time in 100 milliseconds
Dynamic Dead Number Yes Report value dead band limit
Band
Counts Low Number Yes A/D minimum value
Counts High Number Yes A/D maximum value
Eng.Units Low Number Yes Instrument minimum value
Eng.Units High Number Yes Instruments maximum value
Alarm On Number Yes High/ Low delay in 1 second
Delay1
132 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003


name able
Alarm Off Number Yes High/ Low delay in 1 second
Delay1
Alarm On Number Yes HighHigh/LowLow delay in 1 second
Delay2
Alarm Off Number Yes HighHigh/LowLow delay in 1 second
Delay2
Table 5 Analogue input channel parameters.
Digital input tag parameters

digital input tags are used for.
Name able
Description Text No Description of a tag
the tag
State Text No Input status after time delay
cessing Unit
number
group
alarm
Open
Closed
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 133


Name able
Alarm On Delay Number Yes Delay in 1 second
Alarm Off Delay Number Yes Delay in 1 second
Signal Cond. On Number Yes Delay of signal before handled by alarm
Signal Cond Off Number Yes Delay of signal before handled by alarm
Signal Cond In- Yes/No Yes Invert input status
vert
Table 6 Digital input channel parameters.
3.3.9 How to change alarm limits

→ Refer to page 130 How to change parameters.
3.3.10 How to change alarm delay

→ Refer to page 130 How to change parameters.
134 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

3.4 Local Operator Station
3.4.1 How to view alarms

Note The following is only relevant when the Local Operator Station is
sett up as a local alarm system.
When an alarm occurs, the appointed Local Operator Station will
display the alarm message, sound the buzzer and activate the horn.
The display will look like this:
Alarm!
|View| |Ignore|
Figure 53 Alarm display.
1 To silence the buzzer and horn, push SOUND OFF.
2 To go back to what was previously displayed on the Local

Operator Station push F4 (Ignore).
3 To view the new alarm push F1 (View), this will take you to
the top of the alarm history.
3.4.2 How to acknowledge alarms

- Unacknowledged alarms have an”*” in front of the alarm
message.
1 In the Alarm History, Alarm Summary and Alarm Details an

unacknowledged alarm event or tag can be acknowledged by
selecting it and pushing ACK.
2 The state will change from unacknowledged to
acknowledged or back to normal if the alarm condition is no
longer present.
3.4.3 How to turn the sound off
1 To silence the buzzer and horn push SOUND OFF.
3.4.4 How to display and interpret alarm

history
The Alarm history can be reached in two ways:
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 135

1 When the alarm display is shown push F1.

2 Select Alarm History from the top menu.
3 Push ENTER.
Wed May 12 10:01:51 2001 ALARM HISTORY

>*12 09:58:22 ME0010 Alm IFH
*12.09:57:03 LO0034 Alm Low
12.09:40:21 Fo0044 Alm High
Figure 54 Typical alarm history display.
- All Local Operator Station’s that can connect to a

Distributed Process Unit can view its alarm history and
acknowledge alarms.
- The alarm history is a list of the last 40 alarms for a specific
Distributed Processing Unit. Alarms are sorted by time, the
last alarm event at the top.
- Line 1 of alarm history display shows current time and the
text ALARM HISTORY. The following lines display alarm
events.
- The “>” symbol indicates that the alarm is selected.
4 Use SELECT UP and SELECT DOWN to move up and

down in the list.
5 The DEFAULT button moves you to the top of the list.

- Each alarm event line shows the following data:
>*12 09:58:22 ME0010 Alm IFH
Tag name
Alarm state Time of alarm Event Alarm event type

* = Unacknowledged event Alm = Alarm If no event for this
. = Acknowledged Day of month, Ret = Return tag the highest
= Normal hours : minutes : = No even alarm state is
seconds displayed.
Figure 55 Alarm event interpretation.
136 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

6 An unacknowledged alarm, in focus, can be acknowledged

by pushing the ACK button.
7 Push MENU DOWN or ENTER to display alarm details.
3.4.5 How to display and interpret alarm

details
Alarm details is used to provide more information about an alarm.
1 Select Alarm History as described above.
2 Push ENTER.
3 Select the alarm you want Alarm Details for using

SELECT UP or SELECT DOWN.
4 Push ENTER.
Wed May 12 10:01:51 2001 ALARM HISTORY

>*12 09:58:22 ME0010 Alm IFH
MAIN ENGINE BEARING TEMP
511.2 DEG.C IFH
Figure 56 Alarm details display.
5 An unacknowledged alarm is acknowledged by pushing

ACK.
6 SELECT UP, SELECT DOWN and DEFAULT buttons

can be used to move up and down in the list.
- If the alarm conditions has returned to normal the field is left

blank.
7 Push MENU UP to return to Alarm History.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 137

Alarm event type

Alarm state Time of day Event If no event for this
* = Unacknowledged Day of month, Alm = Alarm tag the highest
. = Acknowledged hours : minutes : Ret = Return alarm state is
= Normal seconds = No even displayed
Tag name
*12 09:58:22 ME0010 Alm IFH

MAIN ENGINE BEARING TEMP
511.7 DEG.C IFH
TAG CURRENT ENGINEERING HIGHEST ALARM

DESCRIPTION VALUE UNIT STATE PRESENT
Figure 57 Alarm details interpretation.
1 From the top menu select Alarm Summary and push

ENTER.
- All Local Operator Stations that can connect to a Distributed
Process Unit can view Alarm Summary and acknowledge
alarms.
- Alarm summary is a list of the last alarms or
unacknowledged states. If the event have returned to normal
the tag data is still displayed and the alarm field will contain
the highest alarm present.
Wed May 12 10:01:51 2001 ALARM SUMMARY

>*12 09:58:22 ME0010 Alm IFH
*12.09:57:03 LO0034 Alm Low
12.09:40:21 Fo0044 Alm High
Figure 58 Alarm summary display.
138 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

3.5 Watch calling system
3.5.1 How to receive a call

- When you receive a call one of the watch location buttons are
flashing.
1 Push SOUND OFF to acknowledge the call.
Figure 59 Buttons used to receive a call. Button texts will vary.
3.5.2 How to respond to alarms

When an alarm condition occur, the buzzer will sound and the
alarm will be indicated on the Watch Bridge Unit. Do the
following:
1 Push SOUND OFF.
2 Read the alarm information on the display or the text next to
the indicator. The ON DUTY engineer should also receive
the alarm indicator and take appropriate action.
3 After a time check that the alarm is no longer displayed on
the Watch Bridge Unit after the alarm condition is corrected.
3.5.3 How to call the ON DUTY engineer

1 Push the CALL XXX (button texts will vary) button to
notify the ON DUTY engineer to contact the bridge.
- The LED indicator will flash until the ON DUTY engineer
has acknowledged the call. Then it will be steady lit.
2 To terminated the call push the button again.
Figure 60 Buttons used to call on duty engineer. Button texts

will vary.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 139

3.5.4 How to transfer watch

responsibility
1 Push WATCH RESPONSIBILITY to notify the other
locations to accept the transfer of the watch responsibility.
- The LED indicator will flash until the transfer is
acknowledged. When the indicator is steady lit watch
responsibility has been transferred.
Figure 61 Buttons used to transfer watch responsibility. Button

texts may vary.
3.5.5 How to accept watch responsibility

- When the indicator for your location begins to flash,
1 Push the button for your watch location.
2 This acknowledges and accepts the transfer of watch
responsibility to you.
3.6 Watch Bridge Unit
3.6.1 How to display alarm information

when in off duty mode
- In Off Duty mode, all Watch Bridge Units can be defined as
either active or passive This is done as part of the
configuration in one of the Remote Operator Stations.
140 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Off Duty ACTIVE

- The panel will not sound alarms but all LED indicators and
the display will show alarm conditions.
Off Duty PASSIVE

- The panel will not sound alarms.
- LCD-type panels will display date and time information
only. Pushing the controls on a LCD panel will display the
alarms.
- The LEDs on the alarm group-type panels will remain dark.
Figure 62 Watch Bridge Unit controls.
3.7 Watch Cabin Unit
3.7.1 How to display alarm information

when duty mode
- In Off Duty mode, all Watch Cabin Units can be defined as
either active or passive This is done as part of the
configuration in one of the Remote Operator Stations.
Off Duty ACTIVE

- The panel will not sound alarms but all LED indicators and
the display will show alarm conditions.
Off Duty PASSIVE

- The panel will not sound alarms.
- LCD-type panels will display date and time information
only. Pushing the controls on a LCD panel will display the
alarms.
- The LEDs on the alarm group-type panels will remain dark.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 141

3.8 Using ShipViewer
3.8.1 Main ShipViewer functions

ShipViewer has the following main functions:
• Counter display
• Alarm displays
• DPU displays
• Deviation displays
• Alarm group displays
• Alarm summery displays
• Alarm history displays
• Selected points display
• Selected trend display
• Selected bargraph display
• Mimic diagrams as found in the Remote Operator Station
3.8.2 Understanding the ShipViewer

display
Overview
All ShipViewer functions are available through the menus bar and
the most frequently used functions are also directly available
through the toolbar buttons. These are further described in the
following.
Menu bar
Toolbar buttons
Figure 63 ShipViewer menu and tool bar.
Toolbar buttons
Print screen
Save image to disk
Print preview
Open image file
142 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Display version and build information
Previous window
Next window , for when you have used previous window
Alarm summary display.

Alarm history display
Alarm group display.
Running hours display.
DPU display.
Deviation display.
Colour codes for data displays

The channel data is colour coded as follows:
- Green: The channel is in a normal state.
- Yellow: The channel is in an alarm state and acknowledged.
- Red: The channel is in an alarm state and not acknowledged.
- Cyan: The channel is in a high priority alarm state.
- Blue: The channel is inhibited.
- Grey: Not updated or invalid values.
The background colour can be set to either dark blue or white. Dark
blue is better to view some coloured texts, while white is better for
printing.
1 In the menu bar select Settings and either select or clear No
background color.
3.8.3 Explanation to the displays
Alarm summary display
The alarm summery display shows currently active alarm entries.

Alarms acknowledged and returned to normal state are not
displayed. The information is instantly updated as soon as
something happens. Alarms are sorted by date and time.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 143

Alarm group display

The alarm group display shows all measuring points in the
predefined alarm groups. These group where defined during
commissioning of the DataChief C20. When selecting the alarm
group display, a dialog containing all alarm groups appear on the
screen. In this dialog all alarm groups with active alarms are
indicated by a red dot.
1 Select an alarm group by pushing its button .

2 To go between alarm group view and group view push the
Alarm Display/Group Display button (at the bottom)
repeatedly.
- The alarm and group displays are sorted by tag name.
Alarm history display
The alarm history display shows both active and alarms returned
to normal.
1 Scroll through the pages using the Page Up and Page Down
buttons on the keyboard.
- The information is instantly updated as soon as something
happens. Alarms are sorted by date and time.
Counter display
The counter display shows counters and lap counters for such
components as pumps, generators, engines, etc. included in
counter system on DataChief C20.
Distributed Processing Unit display
The Distributed Processing Unit (DPU) display shows all

measuring points connected to each DPU.
1 Scroll through all units using the Page Up and Page Down
Deviation display
The deviation display shows exhaust deviation data for all engines
having deviation calculations in the DataChief C20.
1 Scroll through all units using the Page Up and Page Down
144 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Selected points display

The selected points display shows one of up to five groups
containing customer selected tags. Each display can include up to
20 tags.
Note More than one window may be open simultaneously. These may be
cascaded or tiled when required (See the Windows drop down
menu). However when you want to configure a new display all
other windows must be closed!
Display existing tag selection
1 In the Displays drop down menu select Selected points
display.
2 Select one of the five groups and push OK.
- The selected points display is shown.
Make or alter tag selection
1 In the Displays drop down menu select Selected points
display.
- The selected points display is shown.
3 Push the Config button.
- The Selected Points Configuration dialog is displayed.
4 Use the Select pull down menu to select system.
5 Select tags and push Add.
- The selected points display can be selected from any of the
different systems available. Select up to twenty tags.
6 Push OK.
Selected trend display

The selected trends display shows one of up to five groups
containing customer selected tags. Each display can include up to
eight tags.
1 In the Displays drop down menu select Selected trend
display.
- The selected trend display is shown.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 145

3 Push the Time button to select trend sample time.

4 Push Stop to halt sampling and Start to restart it again.
5 Select Grid to display a grid in the sampling window.
1 In the Displays drop down menu select Selected trend
display.
- The selected trend display is shown.
4 Select a system under Select.
- The selected trend display can be selected from any of the
different systems available. Select up to eight tags.
6 Push OK.
7 Push the Time button to select trend sample time.
8 Push Stop to halt sampling and Start to restart it again.
9 Select Grid to display a grid in the sampling window.
Selected bargraph display

The selected bargraph display shows one of up to five bargraph
display pages containing customer selected tags. Each display can
include up to twelve tags.
1 In the Displays drop down menu select Selected bargraph
display.
- The selected bargraph display is shown.
1 In the Displays drop down menu select Selected bargraph
display.
- The selected bargraph display is shown.
146 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003


4 Use the Select pull down menu to select system.
- The selected points display can be selected from any of the
different systems available. Select up to twelve tags.
6 Push OK.
Mimic diagrams
All mimic diagrams found in the Remote Operator Station are
available through the ShipViewer. The number and design of these
mimic diagrams are ship dependent.
1 Push the Mimics button on menu bar.
2 Select mimic diagrams from the drop down list.
Figure 64 ShipViewer mimic selection.
3.8.4 How to print displayed information

Use the following procedure to print the information seen on the
1 Select the No background color” is in the Settings menu.
- This reduces the amount of ink used when printing.
Figure 65 ShipViewer Settings menu.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 147

2 Push the print icon in the tool bar.
3.8.5 How to save ShipViewer images

Use the following procedure to save the image seen on the colour
graphics display.
1 Push the save icon in the tool bar.

- A standard file save dialog is displayed.
2 Enter filename and a location and push Save.
- Use any program for handling pictures or bit maps to view
the file.
Figure 66 ShipViewer Save dialog.
3.8.6 How to view saved mimic diagram

files
Use the following procedure to view previously saved image.
1 Push the open icon in the tool bar.

- A standard file open dialog is displayed.
2 Select filename and a location and push Open.
- The file will be displayed using Paint - a Microsoft program
for viewing, editing or creating bitmap images.
148 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Figure 67 Typical open file window.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 149

4 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM
4.1 Introduction
This chapter teaches you how to use the process control system of
the DataChief C20. It is intended for personnel familiar with the
“Getting Started” and “Alarm and Monitoring” sections of this
manual. The following subjects are covered:
- Remote Operator Station process control
- Local Operator Station process control
4.2 About the process control system

The following describes the DataChief C20 process control
system. It can control the following types of equipment:
• Pumps
• Fans
• Compressors
• Valves
It includes:
• PID controllers
150 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Process control system
4.3.1 How to operate a pump starter

Pump starter functions
To control pumps the following functions and features are
available:
• Start and stop sequence for two speeds and two different
directions.
• Alarm reporting for start and stop failure.
• Alarm reporting for tripping or started without commanded.
• Auto & manual control.
• Automatic time delayed restart when recovering from blackout.
• Blocking from operation when Local switch is active or during
blackout.
• Automatic shut down.
• Optional time stamping of every change of operation, allowing
the system to record time of starting, running and stopping.
Pump starter types

The following types of pumps can be operated:
• Single speed: One speed control in one direction.
• Two speed: Two speed in the same direction.
• Two directional: One speed in two directions.
• All speed: Two speed in two directions.
• Single acting: One speed with steady relay control.
Pump symbols
Different pump symbols are used to indicate different types of
pumps.
Figure 68 One way, one speed pump.
Figure 69 One way, two speed pump at low speed.
Figure 70 One way, two speed pump at high speed.
Figure 71 Two way, one speed pump going forward.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 151

Figure 72 Two way, one speed pump going in reverse.
Figure 73 Two way, two speed pump going forward at low

speed.
Figure 74 Two way, two speed pump going forward at high

speed.
Figure 75 Two way, two speed pump going in reverse at low

speed.
Figure 76 Two way, two speed pump going in reverse at high

speed.
Pump symbol colours

Pump symbols have colours according to the state they are in:
Arrow outline colour
- Green: Running
- Grey: Stopped
Arrow fill colour
For two-speed pumps only:
- Arrow fill green: Full speed
- Arrow outline green: Low speed
Circle colour
- Green: Running and remote
- Grey: Stopped and remote
- Blue: Blocked
- Red: Alarm
- White: Local - not ready
- Yellow: Standby
Parameters
Timeout: Time out for start and stop commands.
Wait change direction: Wait time when changing speed direction.
Pulse on: Pulse duration for start and stop commands.
Blackout restart time: The time the equipment is blocked from
auto restarting after a blackout.
152 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Stopped time: Stand still time when changing speed with stop
pulse
Alarm and event enable
Parameters for enabling and disabling alarms and events are
available. Some alarms must be enabled at all times due to
classification society requirements. Start fail and trip alarms are
among these. The following conditions will result in alarms, and
the starter will be set to manual:
• Trip
• Start failure
• Stop failure
• Started without commanded
Modes
The starter can be operated in two different modes; auto and
manual.
- Auto: A unit can be automatically started and stopped.
- Manual: Only manual start and stop is possible.
Restart after blackout applies to both auto and manual modes. The
function is activated when the timer is set to a value larger than
zero, and the blackout detector is referred to by the tag reference.
The shut down and start block functions are active both in auto and
manual modes.
Single acting control
A relay is used to start and stop the controlled unit. The relay is
closed as long as the unit is meant to be running, and opened when
the unit is meant to be stopped. This functionality applies to one
way, one speed units only.
If the the controlled unit does not include a sensor to know if it it
running, the starter will generate the feedback signal internally. In
this way, the event information sent from the starter includes the
current running information.
Blackout
Some equipment starters (provided by some manufacturers) have
the local/remote switch connected serially with the power failure
switch. On a blackout, the starter will lose the remote signal. It is
important that the starter detects the blackout before it is set to
local, and that the remote signal is back before the starter receives
recover from blackout. To solve this set the delay to off at the
running and remote feedback, and the delay to on for the system
blackout signal.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 153

Actual blackout
System blackout
Running feedback
Remote feedback
Recover
Figure 77 Blackout sequence as described above.
How to start one way one speed pumps

1 Select the mimic display showing the pump.
2 Move the cursor over the pump you want to start.
3 Push READ.
- The pump is selected.
- The circle around the pump starts flashing.
1 4 Push ACTIVATE/START
- The pump symbol turns green.
- The pump status changes to Running.
How to stop one way one speed pumps

2 Move the cursor over the pump you want to stop.
3 Push READ.
0 4 Push DEACTIVATE/STOP.
- The pump symbol turns grey.
- The pump status changes to Ready to start, remote CTRL,.
How to operate two way and to speed pumps

2 Move the cursor over the pump you want to operate.
3 Push READ.
- Dependent on the pump type one of the following windows
is displayed:
154 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Figure 78 Menu for two speed pump
Figure 79 Menu for two way pump
Figure 80 Menu for two speed, two way pump. Actual

text may differ.
To start and stop

4 Move the cursor over the Start or Stop button.
5 Push READ.
- The valve symbol changes colour to green for start, or grey
for stop.
To change speed or direction
6 Move the cursor over the corresponding option button.
7 Push READ.
8 Move the cursor over the Start button.
9 Push READ.
Note When changing direction the pump will stop, and start in the
reverse direction after a delay. The delay is configurable.
How to reset pumps

The pump logic must be reset when the pump has tripped or as the
result of a start failure.
ALARM 1 Push Alarm Ack to acknowledge the alarm

ACK
2 Correct the problem.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 155

4 Move the cursor to the symbol for the pump you want to
reset.
5 Push READ.
6 Push RESET.
RESET
- The circle around the pump symbol changes from red to
grey.
Standby pump systems

A standby system includes a pump symbol for each standby pump.
The priority number defines which pump will start first - lowest
number first. The running pump need not have the lowest number.
When two pumps have the same standby number, both will start
simultaneously. If no pump is running, the pump with the lowest
number will start at group start.
AUTO Auto or manual modes
Pump symbol
AUTO (1)
Pressure indicator
STANDBY (2)
Priority
Figure 81 Symbol for standby pump system.
Standby system auto and manual modes

The standby system can be set to one of two modes:
- Auto: For normal standby system operation from the
Remote Operator Station.
- Manual: The standby pump system is disabled. Pumps can
be manually operated.
1 Select the mimic display showing the standby pumps.
AUTO 2 Move the cursor over the standby pumps controller symbol.
3 Push READ.
- The standby pump controller is selected.
- The text background starts flashing.
156 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

AUTO 4 Push Auto/man.

MAN
- The controller changes between auto and manual. The text
background changes between green and grey.
* Green - auto
* Grey - manual
How to start a standby pump system

To operate a pump system i standby mode the pump controller and
each of the pumps must be set to auto. Then one of the pumps must
be started.
MANUAL 2 Move the cursor over the standby pumps controller symbol.
3 Push READ.
AUTO
MAN 4 Push Auto/man.
AUTO - The text background turns green and the text changes to
Auto.
5 Move the cursor over each of the pumps in the pump system.
6 Push READ.

MAN
- The pump status changes to auto.
8 When all pumps are set to auto, move the cursor over the
pump you want to start.
- The pump symbol turns green.
- The pump status changes to Running, auto.
How to stop a standby pump system

To take a pump system out of standby mode set the pump controller
to manual and stop the running pump if required.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 157

AUTO 2 Move the cursor over the standby pumps controller symbol.
3 Push READ.

MAN
- The text background turns grey.
MANUAL - The controller is set to manual.

5 If you want to stop the running pump, move the cursor over
it.
6 Push READ.
0 7 Push DEACTIVATE/STOP
- The pump status changes to Ready to start, remote CTRL.,
manual.
How to take a pump out of the standby system

To take a pump out of the standby system set the pumps to manual.
2 Move the cursor over the pump.
3 Push READ.

MAN
- The pump status changes to manual.
0 5 If you need to stop the pump, push DEACTIVATE/STOP

- The pump status changes to Ready to start, remote CTRL.,
manual.
158 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

How to put a pump back into the standby system

To put a pump into the standby system set the pumps to auto.
2 Move the cursor over the pump.
3 Push READ.

MAN
- The pump status changes to auto.
How to handle a failure to a running pump

When a pump fails it is detected through a drop in pressure.
- The pressure indicator turns yellow indicating a drop in
pressure.
- The 1.st standby pump starts.
- The failing pump goes to manual. It will keep on running or
stop dependent on how the system is configured.
ALARM 1 Push Alarm Ack to acknowledge the alarm.

ACK
How to set standby priority

A standby pump system will normally consist of two or three
pumps.
1 Move the cursor over the pump you want to set as master.
2 Push READ.
3 Push Master.
MASTER
- The text changes to standby (1).
1 Move the cursor over the pump you want to set as first
standby.
2 Push READ.
- The pump is selected. The circle around the pump starts
flashing.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 159

1.ST
STAND
3 Push 1.st standby.
BY
1 Move the cursor over the pump you want to set as next
standby.
2 Push READ.
NEXT
STAND
3 Push Next standby.
BY
4.3.2 How to operate a fan starter
Fan starter functions

To control fans the following functions and features are available:
• Start and stop sequence for two speeds and two different
directions.
• Blocking from operation when Local switch or blackout.
• Optional time stamp on every change of operation, allowing the
system to record time of starting, running and stopping.
Fan starter types

The following types of starters can be operated:
• Single speed: One speed control in one direction.
• Two speed: Two speed in one direction.
• Two directional: One speed in two directions.
• All speed: Two speed in two directions.
• Single acting: One speed with steady relay control.
Fan symbols
Different fan symbols are used to indicate different types of fans.
160 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Figure 82 One way, one speed fan.
Figure 83 One way, two speed fan at low speed.
Figure 84 One way, two speed fan at high speed.
Figure 85 Two way, one speed fan going forward.
Figure 86 Two way, one speed fan going in reverse.
Figure 87 Two way, two speed fan going forward at low speed.
Figure 88 Two way, two speed fan going forward at high speed.
Figure 89 Two way, two speed fan going in reverse at low

speed.
Figure 90 Two way, two speed fan going in reverse at high

speed.
Fan symbol colours

Arrow outline colour
- Green: Running
- Grey: Stopped
Arrow fill colour
For two-speed fans only!
- Shape filled green: Full speed
- Shape outline green: Low speed
Circle colour
- Blue: Blocked
- Red: Alarm
- Yellow: Standby
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 161

How to start a fan

1 Select the mimic display showing the fan.
2 Move the cursor over the fan.
3 Push READ.
- The fan is selected.
- The circle around the fan starts flashing.
- The fan symbol turns green.
How to stop a fan
2 Move the cursor over the fan.
3 Push READ.
- The fan is selected.
- The circle around the fan starts flashing.
- The fan symbol turns grey.
How to reset a fan
The fan logic must be reset when a fan has tripped or as the result
of a start failure.
ALARM
1 Push Alarm Ack to acknowledge the alarm.
ACK
2 Correct the problem, if any.
4 Move the cursor to the symbol for the fan you want to reset.
5 Push READ.
- The fan is selected. The circle around the fan starts flashing.
6 Push RESET.
RESET
- The circle around the fan symbol changes from red to grey.
4.3.3 How to operate a compressor

The main purpose of the compressor starter is to control the
compressors in a compressed air system. The compressor starter
provides automatic start on low pressure and stop on high pressure.
The compressed air system may include one or more compressors
with analogue or binary pressure sensors. The figure describes a
compressor system with one common analogue pressure signal.
162 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

LEADER
FOLLOVER AIR RESERVOIR
Figure 91 A 2-compressor system with common pressure

sensor.
The compressor starter monitors pressure and running signals.
Compressors are started if the pressure is lower than the set limit
and stopped if it is higher. The following functions are handled:
Compressor starter functions
To control compressor the following functions and features are
available:
• Blocking from operation when Local switch is active or during
blackout.
• Optional time stamping of every change of operation, allowing
the system to record time of starting, running and stopping.
Compressor control types
• Analogue pressure 1: One analogue pressure.
• Analogue pressure 2: Two analogue pressures.
• Binary pressure with hysteresis: Pressure switches with built
in hysteresis.
• Binary pressure without hysteresis: Separate pressure
switches for start and stop.
Compressor symbols
Compressors have the following symbol.
Figure 92 Compressor symbol.
Compressor symbol colours

Compressor symbols have colours according to the state they are
in.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 163

Arrow colour
- Green: Running
- Grey: Stopped
Circle colour
- Blue: Blocked
- Red: Alarm
- Yellow: Standby
Leader follower compressor system
A leader follower compressor system includes a symbol for each
compressor. The symbol is described above.
AUTO Auto or manual modes
Compressor symbol
LEADER
FOLLOVER
Figure 93 Leader follower compressor system.
Priorities
For automatic operation, the compressor starter must be set to auto
mode. The compressor starter assigns different start and stop
priorities as follows:
• Leader
• 1.st follower
• 2.nd follower
• 3.rd follower
A compressor can only have one priority at a time. The priority
defines in which order the compressors will start and stop. The start
setting for the 1.st follower must be lower or equal to the leader
start setting and the stop setting for the first follower must be lower
or equal to the leader stop setting. All followers are stopped when
the leader stop setting is reached. For systems with analogue
pressure sensors all followers are stopped when reaching the alarm
high high limit.
164 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Pressure tags
Command timeout: The time the starter will wait before
signalling command timeout.
Pressure filter: The length of time the pressure may stay below the
start limit before the compressor is started.
Wait pressure at start: When a compressor is starting, a new
compressor is started if the pressure has not increased to above the
start limit when this timer has expired.
Blackout recover: The time the compressors are blocked from
auto restarting after a blackout.
Start/stop conditions
Start and stop conditions are adjustable by changing parameters.
Start
Systems using both binary and analogue pressure sensors have
separate start settings for each priority. Start conditions are:
• Pressure lower than the start limit.
• When a compressor is starting, a new compressor is started if
the pressure has not increased to above the start limit when a set
time has expired.
Stop
The stop limit can be the same for all compressors, or individual.
When analogue pressure sensors are used, each priority has
separate stop settings. When binary pressure sensors are used,
separate sensors can be used to define the stop limit for each
priority. A common stop sensor can also be used. All priorities are
stopped by the stop leader setting. Stop conditions are:
• Pressure higher than the stop limit.
• Stop leader signal is active.
• High-high pressure.
Auto
Two modes exist, auto and manual. Select auto mode to set the
compressor automation functionality in operation. Auto mode
operation requires that the starter is not blocked, or in any way
disabled from operating.
The following gives different examples for start and stop
condition:
Leader control
The leader compressor has its own start and stop limits.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 165

pressure
Stop leader
Start leader
time
Figure 94 Leader start stop limits.
Start follower on pressure drop

Each priority has its own start and stop settings. A compressor set
to a priority will start when the pressure lowers below its start
setting, and stop when the pressure rises above its stop setting.
pressure
Stop leader
Stop first follower
Start leader
Start first follower time
Start leader & first follower Stop first follower & leader
Figure 95 Start 1.st follower on pressure setting.
pressure
Common stop setting
Start leader
Start first follower
Start second follower
time
Start leader & two followers Stop compressors
Figure 96 Start two followers on pressure setting.
Start follower after a time delay

The 1.st follower can start on its own pressure setting, or a time
delay after a start condition for the leader compressor. The 2.nd and
3.rd followers will start in similar ways. There is no delayed start
on the start conditions for the topping up compressor.
pressure
start leader
start delay = T4
time
Start leader Start follower on timer
Figure 97 Start follower after a time delay - principle diagram.
166 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

In the illustration below, the third follower will start after a time
delay. The timer is started when the 2.nd follower meets its start
conditions. If the pressure falls below third followers start
conditions before the timer has expired, the third follower will start
immediately.
pressure
Stop leader
Stop first follower
Stop second follower
Start leader
Start delay
Start third follower time
Start leader & two followers Start third follower Stop followers & leader
Figure 98 Start followers after a time delay.

The followers are started on timer. The timer is started when the
leader has start conditions. If the first and second compressor does
not start on their own start settings, the third follower is started 3
times; start delay after the leader had its start condition.
pressure dT = Start delay
Stop leader
Stop first follower
Stop third follower Start timer third follower = 3dT
Start leader 2dT
Start second follower dT
Start third follower time
Start leader & two followers Start first follower Start third follower stop
Figure 99 Follower start timers.

In the illustration below, the followers are started after time delays.
The delay starts when the leader meets its start conditions. If the
first follower meets it own start condition (before the delay has
expired), the second and third followers will reset their timers, and
count the time from this event.
pressure dT = Start delay
Common stop setting
Start third timer = 3dT (interrupted)
Start leader Start third timer = 2dT

Start third follower Start 2.nd timer = 2dT (int.)
Start 2.nd = dT
dT
time
Start leader Start first Start second Start third stop
Figure 100 Interrupted start timer

Built in hysteresis
This function operates using two pressure switches:
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 167

• The leader will start and stop based on the high pressure switch.
• The follower will start and stop in correspondence with the state
of the low pressure switch.
pressure
high
low
time
start start stop start stop stop
leader follower follower follower leader
Figure 101 Built in hysteresis.
By adjusting the pressure switches differently, the two

compressors will function as a pair where one starts before the
other.
Two analogue pressures
In two reservoir systems the compressors are started when one the
pressure sensors indicate below the start limit. The compressors
are stopped when both of the pressure sensors increase above the
stop limit.
pressure
B
stop leader
A
start leader
Start leader Stop leader Start leader
Figure 102 Two analogue pressures
Overhaul function
Two reservoir system have an overhaul function. That is when one
of the reservoirs is disabled from being part of the auto start and
stop logic. There are two ways of setting a reservoir to overhaul:
• Set the pressure sensors belonging to the reservoir to off scan.
The sensor is not included when checking the auto start and stop
limits for the compressors.
• Set a button in the mimic or physical switch on the equipment
to “out of service”. Different configurations are available as
required by the customer.
168 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

How to set auto and manual modes

A leader follower compressor system can be set to one of two
modes:
- Auto: For normal leader follower system operation from the
Remote Operator Station.
- Manual: The leader follower system can only be operated
locally from the starter cabinet.
1 Select the mimic display showing the leader follower
compressor system.
AUTO 2 Move the cursor over the leader follower compressor

auto/manual square where you want to change mode.
3 Push READ.
- The compressor controller is selected. The text background
starts flashing.
AUTO
MAN 4 Push Auto/man.
- The controller changes between auto and manual. The text
background changes between green and grey.
* Green - auto
* Grey - manual
How to start a leader follower compressor system

To operate a leader follower compressor system in standby mode
the compressor controller and each of the compressors must be set
to auto. Then one of the compressors must be started.
Note When the pressure is higher than the stop limit, the compressor will
not start.
compressor system.
MANUAL 2 Move the cursor over the auto/manual controller symbol.
3 Push READ.
- The controller is selected.
AUTO
MAN 4 Push Auto/man
AUTO - The text background turns green and the text changes to
auto.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 169

5 Move the cursor over each of the compressors in the leader

follower system..
6 Push READ.
- The compressor is selected.
- The circle around the compressor starts flashing.
AUTO
7 Push Auto/man.
MAN
- The compressor status changes to auto.
8 Do this for each of the compressors.
9 When all compressors are set to auto, move the cursor to the
compressor you want to start.
10 Push READ.
1 11 Push ACTIVATE/START to to start the compressor.

12 Push Auto/man.
- The button status changes to Running, remote CTRL., auto.
How to stop a leader follower compressor system
To take a leader follower pump system out of standby mode, set the
compressor controller to manual and stop the running compressor
if required.
compressor system.
AUTO 2 Move the cursor over the controller symbol
3 Push READ.
- The controller is selected.
AUTO
MAN
4 Push Auto/man.
MANUAL - The controller is set to manual.

5 If you want to stop the running compressor, move the cursor
over it.
6 Push READ.
170 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

- The compressor symbol turns grey.
- The compressor status changes to Ready to start, remote
CTRL., manual.
How to set leader follower priority
A standby compressor system will normally consist of two or three
compressors.
compressor system.
2 Move the cursor over the compressor you want to set as
leader.
3 Push READ.
4 Push Master.
MASTER
- The text changes to leader.
5 Move the cursor over the compressor you want to set as the
first follower.
6 Push READ.
1.ST 7 Push 1.st standby.

STAND
BY
- The text changes to follower.
1 Move the cursor over the compressor you want to set as the
second follower.
2 Push READ.
NEXT 3 Push Next standby.

STAND
BY
- The text changes to follower (2).
How to reset compressors
The compressor logic must be reset when the compressor has
tripped or as the result of a start failure.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 171

ALARM 1 Push Alarm ack to acknowledge the alarm.

ACK
3 Select the mimic display showing the compressor .
4 Move the cursor to the symbol for the compressor you want
to reset.
5 Push READ.
6 Push RESET.
RESET
- The circle around the compressor symbol changes from red
to grey.
4.3.4 How to open or close valves

Valve control functions
The following functions and features are available:
• Monitoring of the controlled valve
• Pulse or analogue control of valves with analogue feedback
• Blocking from opening
• Blocking from closing
• Blocking from operation (local control)
• Deviation monitoring
• Update alarm status
• Update event status
• Optional time stamp on every change of operation, allowing the
system to record time of positioning
Valve control types

The valve control can operate the following types of
configurations:
On-off valves
• Single acting: One relay for control.
• Single acting with one feedback: One relay for control and one
binary feedback.
• Single acting with two feedbacks: One relay for control and
two binary feedbacks.
172 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

• Single acting with no feedback: No feedback, only single

acting control.
• Double acting: Two relays for control.
• Double acting with one feedback: Two relays for control and
one binary feedback.
• Double acting with two feedbacks: Two relays for control and
two binary feedbacks.
• Double acting with no feedback: No feedback, only double
acting control.
Analogue positioning valves
• Analogue out: Step-less positioning.
• Analogue out with analogue feedback: Step-less control with
analogue feedback.
• Double acting positioning: Pulsed positioning.
• Double acting with analogue feedback: Pulsed positioning
with analogue valve feedback.
• Double acting with one analogue feedback and two binary
feedbacks: Pulsed positioning with one analogue valve
feedback and two binary end feedbacks.
Monitoring
Monitoring is used when only binary feedbacks are interfaced to
the positioner, and no relay or other control is provided.
• One feedback: No control, one binary feedbacks.
• Two feedbacks: No control, two binary feedbacks.
Valve symbols
Different valve symbols are used to indicate different types of
valves.
Figure 103 Valve symbol.
Figure 104 Three way valve symbol.

Valve symbol colours
Valve symbols have colours according to the state they are in.
Single and double acting valves
- Green: Open
- Grey: Closed
- Yellow: Intermediate (opening or closing)
- Blue: Blocked
- Red: Alarm
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 173

Throttle valves
- Green: Feedback at setpoint
- Grey: Closed/stopped
- Yellow: Feedback outside deadband
- Blue: Blocked
- Red: Alarm
Throttle valves have set points between 0 and 100 %.
Note As a default, valves will give an alarm on timeout - when not
reaching the end position.
How to open on-off valves

1 Select the mimic display showing the valve.
2 Move the cursor to the symbol for the valve you want to
operate.
3 Push READ.
- The symbol colour is flashing to indicate that it is selected.
- Tag, tag description and the current status of the valve is
displayed at the bottom left of the display.
1 4 Push ACTIVATE/START.
- The current status and the new command is displayed.
- The symbol colour changes to green.
How to close on-off valves
operate.
3 Push READ.
- The valve is selected. Tag, tag description and the current
state of the valve is displayed at the bottom left of the display.
0 4 Push DEACTIVATE/ STOP.

- The current status and new the new command is displayed.
- The symbol colour changes to grey.
How to operate analogue valves
174 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

operate.
3 Push READ.
- The symbol is flashing to indicate that it is selected.
- The text Enter new setpoint (0.0-100.0 %): is displayed.
* 0% - Closed
* 100% - Open
4 Type in the new setpoint.
5 Push Enter.
- The valve setpoint is changed.
How to operate throttle valves
operate.
3 Push READ.
- The equipment is selected.
- The symbol is flashing to indicate that it is selected.
- The following window is displayed:
Figure 105 Menu for analogue valves.

Open valve to 100%
4 To open the valve to 100% use the trackball to point to the

open button and push Read.
- The status changes, first to opening then to opened.
Close valve to 0%
5 To close the valve to 0% use the trackball to point to the close

button and push Read.
- The status changes, first to closing then to closed.
Throttle mode
6 To set the setpoint to a value between 0 and 100% use the
trackball to point to the Throttle mode check box and push
Read.
- The menu buttons changes to increase and decrease.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 175

Figure 106 Menu for analogue valves in throttle mode.
7 Move the cursor over the Increase or Decrease button.
8 Push READ.
9 Type in the new setpoint value.
10 Push ENTER.
- The setpoint changes.
How to reset valves

Resetting of valves is required on timeout.
reset.
3 Push READ.
- The valve is selected. Tag, tag description and the current
status of the valve is displayed at the bottom left of the
display.
4 Push RESET.
RESET
- The symbol colour changes to grey.
4.3.5 How to operate a PID controller
PID controller symbol

The PID controller keeps a process signal at a pre-defined value.
The controller is used for temperature controlled valves, pressure
controlled valves, frequency controlled pumps etc.
176 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Valve feedback
Process
setpoint
Process
Process feedback
Figure 107 PID controller.

The controller can operate in two modes:
* Active (on): This is the normal PID controller mode. The
controller operates when active.
* Deactive (off). The PID controller does not control the
process. If the controller operates on an actuator, manual
valve positioning is possible.
FW COOLING Process
feedback
100 Process
setpoint
ACTIVE Status
Alarm status
indicator
TEMP. Setp.
PID controller
62 60
setpoint
Deg. C 0 Deg. C
Actual value
Actuator 0 100%
Setp. 28 Actuator
FB 32
Actuator setpoint, used used

when control is deactive
Actuator feedback
Indicator green when active,
grey when deactive
Figure 108 PID controller symbol.
PID controller symbol colours

- Green: Active
- Blue: Blocked or configuration fail
- Grey: Deactive
- Red: Alarm
To select a PID controller
1 Select the mimic display showing the PID controller.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 177

2 Move the cursor over the symbol for the PID controller you
want to operate.
3 Push READ.
- The PID controller is selected. A flashing yellow square is
displayed around the controller.
- Tag, tag description and the current state of the PID
controller is displayed at the bottom left of the display.
ME HFO TEMP
200
ACTIVE Status
TEMP. Setp.
123 120
Deg. C 0 Deg. C
Actuator 0 100%
Setp. 67
Feedb. 67
Figure 109 Symbol for an active PID controller.
To activate the controller
want to operate and push READ.
1 2 Push ACTIVATE/START.
- The Active circle turns green. The controller setpoint is
shown in the Setp. field. Actuator setpoint is shown both as
a percentage and a bargraph. A setpoint command is sent to
the controller.
3 To enter a new setpoint push READ.

- The prompt ACT., DEACT. or Enter New PROCESS setpoint
is displayed.
4 Type in the new value using the numeric keyboard.
5 Push ENTER.
- The new process setpoint is displayed. The PID controller
adjusts the actuator to make the process feedback equal to the
new setpoint.
To deactivate the controller
want to operate and push READ.
178 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

0 2 Push DEACTIVATE/STOP.
- The Active circle turns grey. The controller setpoint is no
longer displayed, but showing N/A in the Setp. field.
Actuator setpoint is shown both as a percentage and a
bargraph. A setpoint command is sent to the positioner.
3 To enter a new actuator setpoint push READ.

- The prompt ACT., DEACT. or Enter New PROCESS setpoint
is displayed.
4 Type in the new value using the numeric keyboard.
5 Push ENTER.
- The new actuator setpoint is displayed.
Note You must manually adjust the actuator to make the process
feedback equal to the required value.
ME HFO TEMP
200
ACTIVE Status
TEMP. Setp.
123 N/A
Deg. C 0 Deg. C
Actuator 0 100%
Setp. 67
Feedb. 67
Figure 110 Symbol for a PID controller that is not active.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 179

4.4 Local Operator Station
4.4.1 How to operate pumps or fans

from the Local Operator Station
To operate pumps or fans from the Local Operator Station do the
following:
1 The Local Operator Station must be physically connected to
the same CAN segment as the DPU controlling the pump or
fan.
2 When connected push MENU UP.

- You should now see the LOS top menu and a list of DPU’s
connected to the CAN segment.

select the DPU controlling the pump or fan. The selected
DPU must be displayed in line two.
4 Push MENU DOWN to select it.

- Observe the DPU Top Menu.
5 Push MENU DOWN to select the Tag Overview Menu.

- Observe the DPU Tag Overview display.
- Channel numbers are indicated on the left side.
- Function tag channels for pumps and fans are organised as
follows:
DPU module Function tag channels
for starters, valves etc.
RAi-16 33 - 47
RAi-32 33 - 47
RIO-C1 33 - 47
RIO-C2 33 - 47
dPSC 1 - 99
6 Select the function tag channel for the pump or fan you want
to operate using the SELECT UP and SELECT DOWN
buttons.
7 Use the ARROW BUTTONS to go between Tag

Description and Tag Name.
180 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

33 AM132S Ready for Start
Channel Tag Tag

number name status
8 Push MENU DOWN to go to the Tag Details Starter display.

- Observe the Tag Details Starter display.
- In this display you can change database parameters for this
tag. (Described elsewhere).
- To be able to control pumps or fans the system requires a
password.
9 Push F1 to select the Common Menu.
10 Push SELECT UP or SELECT DOWN to select the

Password parameter.
11 Enter the Password. (Described elsewhere).
12 Push ENTER.
13 If not already selected, push F4 to select the Application
Menu.
14 Push and hold MENU DOWN and at the same time push F2.
- Observe the Commands for Starter Menu.

- Available commands for the function tag are displayed.
15 Use the SELECT UP or SELECT DOWN buttons to see all

available commands.
- The first set of commands are:
* F1 Start LF (low forward, normal start)
* F2 Start HF (high forward)
* F3 Start LR (low reverse)
* F4 Start HR (high reverse)
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 181

Commands for Starter DPU 032/01.05.24

Start commands : 2 / 120
33 AM132S Ready for start
|Start LF |Start HF |Start LR |Start HR
Figure 111 Typical control display starter, first set.
- The second set of commands are:

* F1 Stop
* F2 Reset
* F3 Auto
* F4 Semi Auto
Commands for Starter DPU 032/01.05.24

Stop & aux commands : 2 / 120
33 AM132S Ready for start
|Stop |Reset |Auto |Semi Auto
Figure 112 Typical control display starter, second set.
- The meaning of lamp indication for the function keys are:

* Fixed light - function active
* Flashing - function activating
* Dark - not active
16 Use the ARROW BUTTONS to go between the next and

previous function tag at the same operational level.
17 To exit push MENU UP several times until you reach the Tag
Overview display.
18 Push F1 to disconnect the DPU.

- The DPU list is displayed.
182 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

4.4.2 How to operate valves from the

Local Operator Station
To operate valves from the Local Operator Station do the
following:
1 The Local Operator Station must be physically connected to
the same CAN segment as the DPU controlling the valve.
2 When connected push MENU UP.

- You should now see the LOS top menu and a list of DPU’s
connected to the CAN segment.

select the DPU controlling the valve. The selected DPU must
be displayed in line two.
4 Push MENU DOWN to select it.

- Observe the DPU Top Menu.
5 Push MENU DOWN to go to the Tag Overview Menu.

- Observe the DPU Tag Overview display.
- Channel numbers are indicated on the left side.
- Function tag channels for valves are organised as follows:
DPU module Function tag channels
for starters, valves etc.
RAi-16 33 - 47
RAi-32 33 - 47
RIO-C1 33 - 47
RIO-C2 33 - 47
dPSC 1 - 99
6 Select the function tag channel for the valve you want to
operate using the SELECT UP and SELECT DOWN
buttons.
36 NM 13P Closed AUTO
Channel Tag Tag

number name status
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 183

7 Use the ARROW BUTTONS to go between Tag

Description and Tag Name.
8 Push MENU DOWN to go to the Tag Details Positioner

display.
- Observe the Tag Details Positioner display.
- In this display you can change database parameters for this
tag. (Described elsewhere).
- To be able to control valves the system requires a password.
9 Push F1 to select the Common Menu.
10 Push SELECT UP or SELECT DOWN to select the

Password parameter.
11 Enter the Password. (Described elsewhere).
12 Push ENTER.
13 If not already selected push F4 to select the Application

Menu.
14 Push and hold MENU DOWN and at the same time push F2.
- Observe the commands for the Positioner Menu.

- Available commands for the function tag are displayed.
15 Use the SELECT UP or SELECT DOWN buttons to see all

available commands.
- The first set of commands are:
* F1 Open
* F2 Close
* F3 Reset
Commands for Positioner DPU 106/02.11.27

Adjust Setpoint 0.0
36 NM 64P Closed Auto
|Open |Close |Reset |
Figure 113 Typical control display for positioner, first set.

- The second set of commands are:
* F1 Thr.Open (throttle open)
184 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

* F2 Thr.Close (throttle close)

* F3 Auto
* F4 Semi Auto
Commands for Positioner DPU 106/02.11.27

Not used for analog: 2 / 120 R
36 NM 64P Closed Auto
|Thr.Open |Thr.Close| Auto |Semi Auto
Figure 114 Typical control display for positioner, second set.
- The meaning of lamp indication for the function keys are:

* Fixed light - function active
* Flashing - function activating
* Dark - not active.
16 Use the ARROW BUTTONS to go between the next and

previous valve function tag at the same operational level.
17 To exit push MENU UP several times until you reach the Tag
Overview display.
18 Push F1 to disconnect the DPU.

- The DPU list is displayed.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 185

5 POWER MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
5.1 Introduction
This chapter teaches you how to use the power management
system of the DataChief C20. It is intended for personnel familiar
with the “Getting Started” and “Alarm and Monitoring” sections
of this manual. The following subjects are covered:
- About the power management system
- Remote Operator Station process control
- Midi Operator Station process control
186 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Power management system
5.2 About the power management system

Changeover functionality
Any alarm for the generator set can be configured to have change
over functionality. When any of these alarms are given, a standby
diesel generator starts and connects. The failing generator will then
unload and disconnect. After the generator is disconnected the
diesel may continue running, cool down and stop or stop directly,
dependent on the configuration.
Automatic start and connect on blackout

When a main switchboard blackout occurs, the 1.st. standby diesel
generator will start and connect. If it fails to start or connect, the
next standby diesel generator will start and connect. It is possible
to configure the system to start more than one standby generator
on blackout.
Load dependent start and stop of standby

generators
When a high load occurs on on the connected generator(s), the 1.st
standby generator will start and connect. When the load decreases
enough to let a generator disconnect without overloading the
remaining, the 1.st to stop generator will disconnect and stop.
Control of heavy consumers start request and

start granted
When a heavy consumer start request is received, the power
management system will check for available power.
* If enough power is available and a predefined number of
generators are connected, the power management system
gives a “start granted” to the consumer.
* If enough power is not available, the standby generator(s)
will automatically start and connect. When enough power
is available, a “start granted” is given to the consumer.
* When more than one heavy consumer sends a “request for
start”, only one is granted at a time. The power
management system remembers all start requests and
enables them in sequence.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 187

5.3.1 Overview
The power management system is mainly operated through a
mimic picture reflecting the ships power distribution system. The
system can manage electrical generators driven by diesel engine,
steam turbine or the main engine. The operator controls have
different configurations dependent on the type of generator drive.
A typical mimic picture is shown below:
Figure 115 Typical power management system mimic picture.
5.3.2 How to operate a generator set

with start/stop control
Generator set symbol colour interpretation

A generator with its prime mover and circuit breaker (as seen
below) is called a generator set. The following information is
contained in the colours used for the generator set.
188 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Circuit braker symbol

y Red dot: Circuit breaker alarm
y In disconnected position:
Gray: Open
Yellow: Syncronizing/connecting
y In connected position:
Green: Connected
Yellow: Disconnecting
Generator symbol
y Red dot: Generator alarm
y Gray: Stopped
y Green: Running, ready to connect
Prime mover symbol

y Red dot: Prime mover alarm
y Gray: Stopped
y Grey and yellow: Starting
y Green: Running
y Green and yellow: Stopping
Generator set information box

Each generator set has an information box containing the
following information:
Mode: Local/semi-auto/auto.
Operational state of the generator set.
Standby status information, priority in brackets.
Low load auto stop blocked.
Fuel selection/load control selection.
Figure 116 Generator set information box.
To display the control dialog

1 Select the the power management mimic picture.
2 Move the cursor to the generator set you want to control.
3 Push the READ button.

- A new dialog appears containing buttons to operate the
generator set. This dialog will vary according to how the
generator set is configured. The following is a maximum
configuration:
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 189

Push to start the generator.

Push to connect the generator.
Push to disconnect the generator.

Push to stop the generator.
Push to turn off load dependent stop function.
Push to set the generator to semi-auto mode.
Push to give the generator lower priority.
Push to select diesel oil only.
Push to turn on load dependent stop function.
Push to select frequency and load control by governor.
Push to reset alarm messages.
Push to set the generator to auto mode.
Push to give the generator higher priority.
Push to select heavy fuel/diesel oil change over logic.
Push to select frequency and load control by DataChie
Figure 117 Control dialog for generator set with start/stop.
Semi Auto mode

In semi auto mode the operator controls the generator set using the
buttons in the dialog to start or stop, connect or disconnect it
according to the load condition.
Note For Semi Auto mode the following applies:
* A generator set must be started before it can be connected.
* A disconnect will unload and disconnect the generator but
the diesel will remain running.
* The generator set will not be part of the standby system.
To start a generator
1 Push Start.
- The prime mover symbol turns yellow and grey. This means
it is starting.
- Then the prime mover symbol turns green. This means that
it is running idle.
- Then the generator symbol turns green. This means that it is
running nominal and ready to connect.
To connect a generator
This is only possible when the prime mover is running at nominal
speed.
1 Push Connect.
- The circuit breaker symbol turns yellow. This means that the
generator is synchronizing.
- The circuit breaker symbol indicates connected and turns
green. This means that the generator is connected.
190 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

To disconnect a generator
1 Push Disconnect.
generator is unloading.
- The circuit breaker symbol indicates disconnected and turns
grey. This means that the generator is disconnected.
To stop a generator
This is only possible when the circuit breaker is disconnected.
1 Push Stop.
- The text cooling down is displayed. This means that the
generator set is cooling down. After cool down time out the
prime mover symbol turns green and yellow. This means that
the prime mover is stopping.
- The prime mover symbol turns grey. This means that the
prime mover has stopped.
2 To stop the prime mover immediately, without cooling
down, push Stop twice.
Auto mode
In auto mode the generator is automatically started and stopped
according to the load condition and the priority setting.
Note For Auto mode the following applies:
* A disconnect command will cause the following
sequence: Unloading, disconnect, cool down and stop.
* A stop command will cause the following sequence:
Unloading, disconnect and direct stop.
* A connect command will cause the following sequence:
Starting, synchronizing and connect.
* A start command will cause a starting sequence only.
This is only possible when the prime mover is stopped and ready
for start.
1 Push Connect.
it is starting.
it is running idle.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 191

1 Push Disconnect.
2 To stop the prime mover immediately, without cooling
To stop a generator
When the circuit breaker is connected:
1 Push Stop.
prime mover has stopped. This is a direct stop without
cooling down period.
When the circuit breaker is disconnected:
1 Push Stop.
2 To stop the prime mover immediately push Stop twice.
1 Push Start.
it is starting.
it is running idle.
192 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Stop block On/Off

1 Push On to block the load dependent stop function.
- This means that the generator will not stop when there is a
low load on the main switchboard.
2 Push Off to activate the load dependent stop function.
- This means that the generator will stop when there is a low
load on the main switchboard.
Pri. Higher/Lower
The generator set with the highest priority will start first and stop
last. The generator set with the lowest priority will start last and
stop first.
1 Push Pri. Higher to give the generator set a higher standby
priority. The indicated standby number is lowered by one.
2 Push Pri. Lower to give the generator set a lower standby
priority.The indicated standby number is increased by one.
HFO - Heavy Fuel Oil

1 Push HFO to activate the heavy fuel oil change over logic.
- The heavy fuel oil change over logic will start and stop the
prime mover using diesel oil, but will switch to heavy fuel
oil during loaded condition.
DO - Diesel Oil
1 Push DO to run the prime mover on diesel oil only.
- The heavy fuel oil change over logic is not in use.
Droop
1 Push Droop to select frequency and load control by the
DataChief C20, based on diesel engine speed governor
droop curve (static).
Isochron - Isochroneous
1 Push Isochron to select frequency and load control by the
diesel engine speed governor.
Reset
1 Push Reset to reset any alarm messages.
- Before resetting any alarm rectify the the problem, if any!

without start/stop control
Applicable for shaft generators.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 193


1 Select the power management mimic picture.

generator set.
- The following illustration shows what each of the buttons are
used for:

Figure 118 Control dialog for generator set without start/stop.
Connect
1 Push Connect.
- When the shaft generator is syncronizing, the diesel
generators connected to the bus bar will regulate the
frequency just below the frequency of the shaft generator.
Disconnect
1 Push Disconnect.
- When the shaft generator is unloading, the diesel generators
connected to the same bus bar will increase their power to
take the load off the shaft generator.
Reset

without start, stop with adjustable
load setpoint
Applicable for steam turbine generators.
194 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003



generator set.
used for:

Push to activate the new load setpoint value.
Insert the load setpoint value here.
Figure 119 Control dialog for generator set without start/stop

with adjustable load setpoint.
Connect
1 Push Connect.
Disconnect
1 Push Disconnect.
Load setp. - load setpoint
1 Move the cursor to the load setpoint text box.
2 Push the READ button to select it.
3 Type in the new load setpoint.
4 Push OK.
- The generator will change the load according to the new
setpoint.
Reset
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 195

5.3.5 How to operate the main

switchboard controller
Main switchboard controller symbols

The main switchboard is available with two different layouts
dependent on the system configuration. The following information
is provided:
Available (spare) power.

Frequency of generated power.
Voltage of generated power.
Status: Local/semi-auto/auto.
Low load autostop blocked.
Symmetric/asymmetric load
sharing mode.
Amount of power generated.
Operational state, red text indicates

an alarm condition.
Figure 120 Main switchboard controller alternative 1.
Available (spare) power.

Operational state, red text indicates an
alarm condition.
Figure 121 Main switchboard controller alternative 2.

2 Move the cursor to the main switchboard.

- A new dialog appears containing buttons to operate the the
main switchboard.
used for:
196 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Push to select symmetric load sharing.

Push to select asymmetric load sharing.
Push to set the main switchboard controller to semi-
auto mode.
Push to set the main switchboard controller to auto
mode.
Figure 122 Control dialog for the main switchboard.
Auto
1 Push Auto to set the main switchboard controller in auto
mode. The standby and blackout recovery functions are in
operation.
- When the load increases above an adjustable limit the
standby generator with the highest priority starts.
- When the load decreases below an adjustable limit the
standby generator with the lowest priority number stops.
- At a blackout the standby generator with the highest priority
starts.
- At a failure on a connected generator the generator with the
highest priority starts. A changeover takes place.
SemiAuto
Note Used for commissioning purposes, do not use for normal
operation! Selecting SemiAuto will cause a Non Standby alarm.
1 Push SemiAuto to set the main switchboard controller in
SemiAuto mode. This will deactivate all logic mentioned
under Auto above.
Sym - Symmetric
1 Push Sym for symmetric load sharing between the
generators.
- The load is shared equally between the generators.
Asym - Asymmetric
1 Push Asym for asymmetric load sharing between two
connected generators. When more than two generators are
connected the asymmetric load sharing is switched of
automatically and will use symmetric load sharing.
- The asymmetric load sharing will attempt the following:
* Run one of the two generators close to the low limit of
20%.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 197

* Run one of the two generators close to the high load limit
of about 80%.
* After an adjustable period of time the two generators will
swap load setpoints.
Reset
1 Push to reset the main switchboard controller when in state
Operation Blocked, Remote Control.
5.3.6 How to operate a bus tie breaker

The control dialog is project specific and may vary from the
illustration below.
2 Move the cursor to the bus tie breaker.

bus tie breaker is displayed.
Connect
1 Push Connect.
- The bus tie breaker symbol turns grey. This means that the
bus tie breaker is closed.
Disconnect
1 Push Disconnect.
bus tie breaker is open.
Reset
5.3.7 How to operate the one touch auto

sequence
One touch auto sequencing allows you to set the main switchboard
to a set of predefined configurations by pushing a button.
One touch auto sequence controller symbol
To simplify power management one touch auto sequencing allows
you to set the main switchboard to a set of predefined
configurations by pushing a button. Typical main switchboard
configurations are:
198 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

* DG-mode (diesel generator mode)

* Manoeuvre mode
* PTO-mode (shaft generator mode)
* PTI-mode (electric propulsion mode)
Figure 123 One touch auto sequence symbol, indicating

current state of operation.

The control dialog is project specific and may vary from the
illustration below.
2 Move the cursor over the one touch auto sequence symbol.

one touch auto sequence.
used for:
Push a mode
button to activate it.
Push to abort the

selected sequence.
Push to reset.
Figure 124 One touch auto sequence dialog box.
To select modes
1 Push the button for the desired mode.
- The system automatically makes the necessary actions to set
the main switchboard to this mode.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 199

5.4 Midi Operator Station
5.4.1 Overview
The power management system is mainly operated through a
mimic picture reflecting the ships power distribution system. The
system can manage electrical generators driven by diesel engine,
steam turbine or the main engine. The operator controls have
different configurations dependent on the type of generator drive.
A typical mimic picture is shown below.
Figure 125 Typical power management system mimic picture.
5.4.2 How to operate the main

switchboard controller
To display the control picture

2 Using the navigator key move the cursor to select one of the
switchboards.
ENTER 3 Push Enter.

- A new picture showing the switchboard and text for the
function keys appear.
200 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Figure 126 Typical main switchboard controller.
4 Use the Page Up and Page Down keys to display all

available functions for the function keys.
- The number of functions will vary according to how the
switchboard is configured.
F1 - F4 5 Push the function key for the desired function.

- The following functions are available:
* Symmetric
* Asymmetric
* Connect more power
* Disconnect surplus power
* Stop block on
* Stop block off
* Reset
* Auto
* Semi-auto
Symmetric
F1 - F4 1 Push the function key for Symmetric for symmetric load

sharing between the generators.
- The load is shared equally between the generators.
Asymmetric
F1 - F4 1 Push the function key for Asymmetric for asymmetric load

sharing between two connected generators. When more than
two generators are connected the asymmetric load sharing is
switched of automatically and will use symmetric load
sharing.
- The asymmetric load sharing will attempt the following:
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 201

* Run one of the two generators close to the low limit of

20%.
* Run one of the two generators close to the high load limit
of about 80%.
* After an adjustable period of time the two generators will
swap load setpoints.
Reset
F1 - F4 1 Push the function key for to reset the main switchboard

controller when in state Operation Blocked, Remote
Control.
Auto
F1 - F4 1 Push the function key for Auto to set the main switchboard
controller in auto mode. The standby and blackout recovery
functions are in operation.
- When the load increases above an adjustable limit the
standby generator with the highest priority starts.
- When the load decreases below an adjustable limit the
standby generator with the lowest priority number stops.
- At a blackout the standby generator with the highest priority
starts.
- At a failure on a connected generator the generator with the
highest priority starts. A changeover takes place.
SemiAuto
Note Used for commissioning purposes, do not use for normal

operation! Selecting SemiAuto will cause a Non Standby alarm.
1 Push the function key for SemiAuto to set the main

switchboard controller in SemiAuto mode. This will
deactivate all logic mentioned under Auto above.

with start/stop control
Generator set symbol colour interpretation

A generator with its prime mover and circuit breaker (as seen
below) is called a generator set. The following information is
contained in the colours used for the generator set.
202 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Circuit braker symbol

y Red dot: Circuit breaker alarm
y In disconnected position:
Gray: Open
Yellow: Syncronizing/connecting
y In connected position:
Green: Connected
Yellow: Disconnecting
Generator symbol
y Red dot: Generator alarm
y Gray: Stopped
y Green: Running, ready to connect
Prime mover symbol

y Red dot: Prime mover alarm
y Gray: Stopped
y Grey and yellow: Starting
y Green: Running
y Green and yellow: Stopping

2 Using the navigator key move the cursor to the generator set
you want to control.
ENTER 3 Push Enter.

- A new picture showing this generator set and text for the

generator set is configured.

* Connect
* Disconnect
* Reset
* Start
* Stop
* Auto
* Semi-auto
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 203

* Stop block on
* Stop block off
* Pri. higher
* Pri. lower
* Switch genset
Figure 127 Generator set with start stop control.
To display detailed information

The following detailed information displays are available:
* Generator frequency
* Generator voltage
* Generator current
* Generator load
* Generator relative load
1 Select a generator set as described above.
2 Using the navigator key move the cursor to the information

you want to display.
Figure 128 Use the navigator to go between these selections.
ENTER 3 Push Enter.

- A new picture showing the detail display is shown. The
following is a detail display for frequency.
204 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Figure 129 Frequency display.
4 Push Enter again to display a tag details view for this tag.
- A new picture showing the tag details view is shown. The
following is a tag details view for a frequency tag.
Figure 130 Tag details view for a frequency tag.

available information.
Semi Auto mode

In semi auto mode the operator controls the generator set using the
function keys to start or stop, connect or disconnect it according to
the load condition.
Note For Semi Auto mode the following applies:
* A generator set must be started before it can be connected.
* A disconnect will unload and disconnect the generator but
the diesel will remain running.
* The generator set will not be part of the standby system.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 205

F1 - F4 1 Push the function key for Start.

it is starting.
it is running idle.
This is only possible when the prime mover is running at nominal
speed.
F1 - F4 1 Push the function key for Connect.

F1 - F4 1 Push the function key for Disconnect.

To stop a generator
This is only possible when the circuit breaker is disconnected.
F1 - F4 1 Push the function key for Stop.

206 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

F1 - F4 2 To stop the prime mover immediately, without cooling

down, push the function key for Stop twice.
Auto mode
In auto mode the generator is automatically started and stopped
according to the load condition and the priority setting.
Note For Auto mode the following applies:
* A disconnect command will cause the following
sequence: Unloading, disconnect, cool down and stop.
* A stop command will cause the following sequence:
Unloading, disconnect and direct stop.
* A connect command will cause the following sequence:
Starting, synchronizing and connect.
* A start command will cause a starting sequence only.
This is only possible when the prime mover is stopped and ready
for start.

it is starting.
it is running idle.

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 207

F1 - F4 2 To stop the prime mover immediately, without cooling

To stop a generator
When the circuit breaker is connected:

prime mover has stopped. This is a direct stop without
cooling down period.
When the circuit breaker is disconnected:

F1 - F4 2 To stop the prime mover immediately push Stop twice.

F1 - F4 1 Push the function key for Start.

it is starting.
it is running idle.
Stop block On/Off
F1 - F4 1 Push the function key for Stop block on to block the load
dependent stop function.
- This means that the generator will not stop when there is a
low load on the main switchboard.
F1 - F4 2 Push the function key for Stop block off to activate the load
dependent stop function.
- This means that the generator will stop when there is a low
load on the main switchboard.
208 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Pri. Higher/Lower
The generator set with the highest priority will start first and stop
last. The generator set with the lowest priority will start last and
stop first.
F1 - F4 1 Push the function key for Pri. Higher to give the generator
set a higher standby priority. The indicated standby number
is lowered by one.
F1 - F4 2 Push the function key for Pri. Lower to give the generator
set a lower standby priority. The indicated standby number
is increased by one.
HFO - Heavy Fuel Oil
F1 - F4 1 Push the function key for HFO to activate the heavy fuel oil
change over logic.
- The heavy fuel oil change over logic will start and stop the
prime mover using diesel oil, but will switch to heavy fuel
oil during loaded condition.
DO - Diesel Oil
F1 - F4 1 Push the function key for DO to run the prime mover on

diesel oil only.
- The heavy fuel oil change over logic is not in use.
Droop
F1 - F4 1 Push the function key for Droop to select frequency and load
control by the DataChief C20, based on diesel engine speed
governor droop curve (static).
Isochron - Isochroneous
F1 - F4 1 Push the function key for Isochron to select frequency and

load control by the diesel engine speed governor.
Reset
F1 - F4 1 Push the function key for Reset to reset any alarm messages.

without start/stop control
Applicable for shaft generators.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 209


ENTER 3 Push Enter.



* Connect
* Disconnect
* Reset
Figure 131 Generator set without start/stop.
Connect

- When the shaft generator is synchronizing, the diesel
generators connected to the bus bar will regulate the
frequency just below the frequency of the shaft generator.
210 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Disconnect

- When the shaft generator is unloading, the diesel generators
connected to the same bus bar will increase their power to
take the load off the shaft generator.
Reset

without start, stop with adjustable
load setpoint
Applicable for steam turbine generators.

1 Select the power management mimic picture.
ENTER 3 Push Enter.



* Connect
* Disconnect
* Load setp.
* Reset
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 211

Connect

Disconnect

Reset
5.4.6 How to operate a bus tie breaker

The control picture is project specific and may vary from the
illustration below.
2 Using the navigator key move the cursor to the bust tie
breaker you want to control.
ENTER 3 Push Enter.

- A new picture showing the bus tie breaker is shown.
212 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Figure 132 Typical bus tie breaker symbol.

F1 - F4 5 Push the function key for the desired mode.

- The system automatically makes the necessary actions to set
the main switchboard to this mode.
Connect

bus tie breaker is closed.
Disconnect

bus tie breaker is open.
Reset
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 213

6 REFERENCE GUIDE
6.1 Introduction
This document gives an overview of parameters that can be
inspected and adjusted from a Local or Remote Operator Station.
Where applicable other details of the parameters’ are included.
- Tage type overview
- Alarm and monitoring parameters
- Engineers safety
214 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Reference guide
6.2 Tag type overview

The following is a list of available tag types in the DataChief C20
Alarm and monitoring system with process control and power
management.
A tag type defines the software used to read a channel on a
Distributed Processing Unit. A channel is where a signal
connected to a Distributed Processing Unit. The tag type defines
witch application to run on the signal.
Example: If channel no. 2 in a Remote Analogue Input module
(RAi-16) is tag type 20, the input signal is 4- 20 mA.
6.2.1 Basic tag types

Tag type number Channel type
0 Undefined type
1 Voltage +-- 0.1
2 Voltage +-- 1
3 Voltage +-- 5
4 Voltage +-- 10
6 Voltage 0 -- 1
7 Voltage 0 -- 1
8 Voltage 0 -- 5
9 Voltage 0 -- 10
11 Milli amps +-- 1
12 Milli amps +-- 5
13 Milli amps +-- 10
14 Milli amps +-- 20
16 Milli amps 0 -- 1
22 PT 50
23 PT 100
24 PT 1000
26 Potmeter 1 K
27 Potmeter 5 K
29 On--off without check (RAi--16)
30 On--off single check (RAi--16)
31 On--off double check (RAi--16)
32 RDi--32 digital input
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 215

Tag type number Channel type

34 Counter event
35 Counter frequency
36 Counter time
38 TC element
40 AC voltage 10 bit
41 AC current 10 bit
43 Generator frequency
44 Bus freq.
45 Phase difference
46 Cosine phi
47 Phase velocity
49 Pick up
128 Exhaust mean
129 Exhaust deviation
130 Rio PLC type
131 DO 401 client
132 DOT (dig. out) handler
133 AO (an. out) 401 client
134 AO (analogue out) handler
135 Exhaust deviation limit
136 Alarm relay
137 Local alarm system
138 LOS 401 client
141 Rotating light handler
142 ASCII IO handler
143 SSC IO handler
144 DS 401 handler
200 Serial AI
201 Serial DI
255 System tag handler
150 Dead man handler
Exhaust tag types are: 128, 129 and 135.
6.2.2 Analogue out tags

Tag type and Distributed Processing Unit type defines the
analogue output channel type. If the Distributed Processing Unit
type is Remote Analogue Output module, the following analogue
output channel types are available:
Channel type number Channel type
0 0 -- 10.0 Volt
1 +-- 10.0 Volt
216 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Reference guide
Channel type number Channel type

2 0 -- 5.0 Volt
3 +-- 5.0 Volt
4 0 -- 20.0 mA
5 4 -- 20.0 mA
6.2.3 Relays
Binary out is defined as a channel in a Remote Digital Output
module. All channels in a Remote Digital Output module are
automatically an output channel type.
6.3 Alarm and monitoring parameters
6.3.1 Analogue input tag items

Parameter Type Adjust-- Function
Name able
Enable Grad. Yes/no Yes Enable/disable aAlarm
Alarm
Enable Alarm Yes/no Yes Enable/disable alarm
Low
Low Low
High
High High
Enable Event Yes/no Yes Enable/disable event
Low
Low Low
High
High High
Gradient Block Number Yes Block if measured value is
Limit < block limit
Gradient Limit Number Yes Gradient alarm limit
Low
High
Low
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 217


Name able
High
Filter Time Number Yes Time in 100 milliseconds
Dynamic Dead Number Yes Report value dead band
Band limit
Counts Low Number Yes A/D minimum value
Counts High Number Yes A/D maximum value
Eng.Units Low Number Yes Instrument minimum value
Eng.Units High Number Yes Instruments maximum
value
Raw Value Number No Measured raw value di-
rectly from ADC
Raw Percent Number No Measured raw value n %
Value of range
Scaled Value Number No Measured value scaled to
technical value
Filtered Value Number No Filtered scaled value
Some of the parameters are further explained below.
Enable alarms and events
Alarms may be enabled or disabled by altering the value of the
enable parameters. Select YES for enable, NO for disable.
Gradient parameters
The gradient calculation uses the filtered value as input. In order
to make the gradient more robust against noise, it is calculated
based on a moving average over the three last samples of the
filtered value. When the process value falls below the Block limit
the gradient alarm will be blocked. Above this process value, the
gradient alarm is activated if the calculated gradient value exceeds
the Gradient Limit.
• Block limit: A process value below this limit inhibits the
gradient alarm.
• Gradient Limit: The gradient alarm is activated if the gradient
value in [units/sec] exceeds this limit.
6.3.2 Alarm and event limits

Alarm and event limits are entered in technical units. Each alarm
& event limit has it’s own enable flag. If the enable flag is set, the
alarm/event status will be updated. If the enable flag is not set the
corresponding status is cleared.
218 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Reference guide
The filtered process value is compared with four alarm and four
event limits. The alarm and event status is updated as follows (if
the enable flag is set):
1 LL= on, if Filtered_value < alarm_LL limit.
2 L = on, if Filtered_value < alarm_L limit.
3 H = on, if Filtered_value > alarm_H limit.
4 HH = on, if Filtered_value > alarm_HH limit.
5 Ev_1 = on, if Filtered_value > event_1 limit.
The LL, L, H and HH alarms are activated as soon as the alarm
delays has expired.
6.3.3 Filter time

The filter function is a 2nd order Butterworth filter. The scaled
process value is filtered with a user defined filter time constant,
which defines the cut-off frequency for the filter. The time constant
resolution is 0.1 seconds. A time constant = 0 disables the filter,
hence the lowest cut-off frequency is 10 Hz with the time constant
set to 0.1 seconds.
6.3.4 Dynamic deadband

The dynamic dead band is entered in engineering units with the
same number of decimals as specified for the process value. The
dynamic dead band parameter is only in use if the external tag
parameter is set to YES. This parameter is used for dynamic update
of the process value for external tag users. When the process value
becomes greater/less than the last sent value with more than the
dynamic dead-band, a new value is sent.
6.3.5 Scaling parameters

The scaling parameters are given in corresponding pairs of
technical values and measured values read from the analogue to
digital converter.
The technical sensor range is: Eng.Units High – Eng.Units Low.
The instrument range is: Counts High – Counts Low.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 219

Eng. EU High
value
Counts Low
ADC Input
Counts High
EU Low
Figure 133 Scaling parameters.
Measured values
Each channel is sampled from a 16 bit analogue to digital converter
every 10 milliseconds. The result of this sampling is a value in the
range 0 – 65535 Counts. Depending on the type of signal
connected, the legal count range may be less. The table below
shows the count range for the different signal types available:
Code Short Text Counts High Counts Low
1 VOLT_PM_01 45874 19660
2 VOLT_PM_1 45874 19660
3 VOLT_PM_5 45874 19660
4 VOLT_PM_10 58981 6553
6 VOLT_0_01 45874 32767
7 VOLT_0_1 45874 32767
8 VOLT_0_5 45874 32767
9 VOLT_0_10 58981 32767
11 MA_PM_1 58981 6553
12 MA_PM_5 39321 26214
13 MA_PM_10 45874 19660
14 MA_PM_20 58981 6553
16 MA_0_1 58981 32767
17 MA_0_5 39321 32767
18 MA_0_10 45874 32767
19 MA_0_20 58981 32767
20 MA_4_20 58981 38010
22 PT_50 1) 1)
23 PT_100 1) 1)
24 PT_1000 1) 1)
26 POT_1K 2) 2)
27 POT_5K 2) 2)
220 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Reference guide
1 The RTD elements are automatically calculated based on

interpolation with values fetched from a predefined table.
The scaling parameters are therefore not adjustable.
2 The potentiometer signal types are automatically calculated
based on a conversion algorithm. The counts scaling
parameters is therefore not adjustable.
The Raw Value for a channel is the result of the sampling of the
analogue to digital converter. By using the scaling parameters the
Scaled Value is calculated, and from this value the raw percent
value is calculated ( ± 100.00). The Scaled Value is used as input
to the 2 nd order butterworth filter to produce the Filtered Value.
6.3.6 Counter input tag items

Parameter Name Type Adjust-- Function
able
Enable Alarm Low Yes/no Yes Enable/disable
alarm
Enable Alarm Low Yes/no Yes Enable/disable
Low alarm
Enable Alarm High Yes/no Yes Enable/disable
alarm
Enable Alarm High Yes/no Yes Enable/disable
High alarm
Enable Event Low Yes/no Yes Enable/disable
event
Enable Event Low Yes/no Yes Enable/disable
Low event
Enable Event High Yes/no Yes Enable/disable
event
Enable Event High Yes/no Yes Enable/disable
High alarm
Limit Alarm Low Low Number Yes Alarm limit
High
Limit Event Low Low Number Yes Event limit
High
Filter time Number Yes Time in 100 millisec-
onds
Filter index Number Yes Counter input pin fil-
ter
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 221


able
Time base Number Yes Counting time code:
ms=0:s=1:min=2:hr
=3
Pulses per Eng.Unit Number Yes Pulses per engi-
neering unit.
Raw value Number No Measured raw value
directly from counter
Scaled value Number No Measured value
scaled to technical
value
Filtered value Number No Filtered scaled
value
Dynamic dead band Number No
Parameters specific to counter inputs are described below.
Counter input parameters

Filter Index
When using the counter as an event counter it is possible to filter
the counter input signal with a digital filter in orderto avoid contact
noise to be counted. The Filter Index parameter specifies the
digital filter cut-off frequency according to the table below.
Filter Index Cut--off frequency
0 1 HZ
1 5 HZ
2 10 HZ
3 50 HZ
4 100 HZ
5 500 HZ
6 1667 HZ
Time Base
When using the counter for frequency or time measurements the
Time base parameter specifies in which time unit the
measurement shall be calculated. The following values are
available:
Time Base Time unit
0 Milliseconds
1 Seconds
2 Minutes
3 Hours
Note Time base = 0 is not available when using the counter in frequency
mode.
222 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Reference guide
Pulses per Eng.Unit

When using the counter in frequency measurement mode the
scaling algorithm need to know the number of pulses generated by
the counting sensor per engineering unit. This is specified in the
Pulses pr. Eng Unit parameter.
Pulses per engineering unit is for instance:
• 10 pulses per liter (flow rate).
• 120 pulses per revolution (engine RPM).
• 100 of pulses per knot (ship speed).
Counter input measured values

Raw Value
This value is read directly from the counter. In event counting
mode this value is the same as the scaled value.
Scaled Value
In event counting mode the scaled value is the same as the raw
value. In frequency, counting mode the scaled value is calculated
from the raw value by using the Pulses pr. Eng Unit and the time
base parameters. In time mode, only the Time base parameter is
used to calculate the Scaled value.
Filtered Value
The Scaled Value is used as input to the 2nd order butterworth filter
to produce the Filtered Value.
6.3.7 Digital input tag items

able
On delay Number Yes Delay in 100 millisec-
onds
Off delay Number Yes Delay in 100 millisec-
onds
Enable Alarm Low Yes/no Yes Enable/disable alarm
Enable Alarm High Yes/no Yes Enable/disable alarm
Enable Event Low Yes/no Yes Enable/disable event
Enable Event High Yes/no Yes Enable/disable event
Invert Yes/no Yes Invert input status
Input value Number No Input status before time
delay
Delayed input Number No Input status after time
delay
Only the parameters specific to digital inputs are described below.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 223

Digital input parameters

Delays
Digital input status is delayed to remove rapid irrelevant
transitions. The delay time specifies how long time the signal must
be stable before the new input value is accepted. The delay time is
specified in units of 100 milliseconds. The value 20 means a delay
of 2 seconds.
Invert
The input value can be used directly or inverted before use. Specify
YES to invert the input signal.
Input Values
Input status both before and after time delay is available.
6.3.8 Exhaust mean value tag items

able
Mean temperature Number Yes Alarm limit
high high
Enable alarm high Yes/no Yes Alarm enable/dis-
able
Enable alarm high Yes/no Yes Alarm enable/dis-
high able
Mean temperature Number Yes Alarm limit
high
Mean temperature Number Yes Alarm blocking limit
block
Dev. temperature Number Yes Alarm limit
high
Dev. temperature Number Yes Alarm limit
low
Cylinder 1 temp Number Yes Temperature tag-
number ref.
number ref.
number ref.
number ref.
number ref.
number ref.
number ref.
number ref.
224 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Reference guide

able
number ref.
number ref.
number ref.
number ref.
number ref.
number ref.
number ref.
number ref.
Dynamic alarm lim- Number No Deviation alarm limit
it
Mean Temp Number No Calculated mean
temp
Exhaust mean value parameters

Mean Temp High High/Enable alarm High High
If the mean temperature high high enable is set to YES, the mean
temperature high high alarm is activated if the calculated mean
temperature increases above the mean temperature High high
limit.
Mean Temp High
The mean temperature high alarm is activated if the calculated
mean temperature increases above the mean temperature high
limit.
Dynamic deviation alarm limit
Alarm limit at current mean temperature.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 225

Mean Temp block/Dev. Temp. high/Dev. Temp. Low

If the mean temperature falls below the mean temperature block
limit, all deviation alarms are inhibited. The Dev. Temp. low limit
defines the maximum allowed deviation from the mean
temperature for each cylinder when the mean temperature is equal
to the mean temperature block limit. The Dev. Temp high limit
defines the maximum allowed deviation from the mean
temperature for each cylinder when the mean temperature is equal
to the mean temperature high alarm limit. The actual deviation
alarm limit is a dynamical calculated alarm limit that each cylinder
uses for deviation alarm detection. The figure below gives a
graphical illustration of the different parameters.
Cylinder Exhaust
Temperature
_C
Alarm
600
Zone
500
dtH : Cylinder Exh. temp
Deviation high
limit at Mean temp
400 high limit
300
Alarm
200
Zone
dtL : Cylinder Exh. temp
Deviation low limit
at Mean temp low
100 limit
Engine Mean
Temperature
100 200 300 400 500 600 _C
mtB : Mean temp. al arm mtH : Mean temp.

Alarms are Inhibited blocking limt high alarm limt
in this area
Figure 134 Exhaust mean value

parameters.
Cylinder 1 – 16 temperature
The cylinder (1 – 16) temperature parameters are tag number

references for each cylinder’s temperature measurement. Only the
cylinder references that are in use are used for calculating the mean
temperature.
226 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Reference guide
Mean temperature
The mean temperature is calculated as an average of all the
cylinders specified in the cylinder temperature reference
parameters. Cylinder temperatures that are in instrument fail are
not used in the calculation.
6.3.9 Exhaust deviation tag items

name able
Correction temp Number Yes Correction temp
Cylinder tem- Number Yes This temperature tag-
perature ref. number ref.
Normalized Number No Measured temperature
temp + temperature correc-
tion
There has to be one exhaust deviation tag item for each cylinder.
This tag item checks the normalised cylinder temperature against
the deviation alarm limit calculated by the exhaust mean
temperature tag item and activates the exhaust deviation alarm if
the normalised temperature is outside the legal deviation range.
Exhaust deviation parameters

Correction temperature
Each cylinder’s correction temperature is calculated only on
request from the operator. This is normally done when the engine
is running in steady state at 100% load. The reason for using a
correction temperature is that all cylinders have their own normal
operating temperatures, which mostly are not equal to the engine
mean temperature. By Adding the correction temperature to the
real cylinder temperature, the cylinder temperature is normalised
so that the deviation alarm limits are valid for all cylinders. The
correction temperature is calculated in the following way:
Correction_temperature = Meantemp -
RealCylindertemp
Cylinder temperature reference

The cylinder temperature ref. parameter is a tag number reference
to the cylinders temperature.
Normalised Temp
The Normalised temperature is calculated in the following way:
Cylinder_normalised_temp = RealCylindertemp +
Correction_temp
This normalised cylinder temperature is again used for checking
against the deviation limits to generate the deviation alarm.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 227

6.3.10 Common submenu items

Name able
Tag type Number Yes RIO channel type
Decimal point Number Yes Fixed point location for tag
analoge value
External tag Yes/no No Yes if tag is used by some
other tag
Tag name Text No Tag’s global name
Common submenu parameters

Tag type
The channel type is a code specifying how the input signal is
handled and scaled. There are 255 different codes available.
Decimal point
Technical process values are represented as a fixed-point value.
The number 234.23 is internally represented with a value of 23423
and a decimal point of 2. Note that control applications mostly
have decimal point 1.
Tag names
The External Tag parameter = YES means that this tag is used by
another module. Most control applications are externals. The tags
value will be automatically transmitted for external use. The Tag
Name parameter is the global tag name. These parameters can not
be changed from a Local Operator Station.
6.3.11 Alarm submenu items

Name able
Alarm on delay1 Number Yes High/ low delay on (1
second)
Alarm off delay1 Number Yes High/ low delay off (1
second)
Alarm on delay2 Number Yes HighHigh/lowlow delay
on (1 second)
Alarm off delay2 Number Yes Highhigh/lowlow delay
off (1 second)
Inhibit on delay Number Yes Inhibit delay on (1 sec-
ond)
Inhibit off delay Number Yes Inhibit delay off (1 sec-
ond)
Inhibit tag Number Yes Tagnumber to inhibit
this channel
228 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Reference guide
Alarm and inhibit deleays

There are separate parameters for alarm delay on and off, as well
as delay of inhibit on and off. When the conditions for alarm or
inhibit is changed, a timer is started. The new condition must be
stable for the time specified by the delay parameter before the new
alarm condition is accepted and an event is issued. Delays are
specified in seconds.
Inhibit parameters
Tag Number
Specifies the tag number to check status for. The specified tag
number’s external parameter must be set to activate the Process
Data Object (PDO) transmission on changes.
6.4 Engineers safety

The engineers safety (dead man) system is a system for engineer
fitness. When activated, the reset button must be pressed by the
engineer within predefined time period, if not, the system will
indicate ”Engineer fitness alarm”.
6.4.1 Functions
• Start, stop and reset from pushbuttons.
• Control from the Remote Operator Station.
• Warning light activated by relay.
• Alarm horn activated by relay.
• Range check of timers according to IMO rules.
When active, the system will activate a rotating light after expired
time delay. The engineer must now reset the system. If the system
is not reset within a new time period, the system will activate an
alarm. Reset can be pressed at any time. The system will typically
be activated from the Remote Operator Station by selected alarms
when running an unattended engine room.
6.4.2 Local control

The system is activated and de-activated manually by a
key-switch. The system can also be activated automatically from
the alarm system when an engine room alarm occurs during
unattended engine room. A number of reset push buttons are
located around the ship.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 229

6.4.3 Remote Operator Station control

When an alarm occur in bridge watch, the engineer safety handler
is activated. The timers are reset every time activated. The timers
are not reset by the command from Remote Operator Station, if
already running.
6.4.4 Parameters
Parameter Type Adj. Function Initial Par.
name value ref.
Tag1: Start Number Yes Start/on digital input Tag1
Tag reference
Tag2: Stop Number Yes Stop/off digital input Tag2
Tag reference
Tag3: Re- Number Yes Reset digital input Tag Tag3
set reference
Tag4: On Number Yes Remote Operator Sta- Tag4
Watch tion Tag for telling the
Dead man system that
someone is set on
Watch
Tag5: New Number Yes Remote Operator Sta- Tag5
Alarm tion Tag for telling the
Dead man system that
a new alarm is acti-
vated.
T1: Warn- Number Yes Time from reset or start 20 Min P1
ing time until warning is acti-
vated
T2: Alarm Number Yes Time from warning is 150 P2
time activated until alarm Sec
S1: IMO Yes/no Yes Enable check timers Yes B1
Compliant according to IMO rules
for machinery dead
man system
Tag 4 and 5 are used when the dead man handler is part of the Watch
Calling System at the Remote Operator Station. Then the tag
pointed to by tag4 is active when the Watch Calling System is set
to bridge watch. When an alarm occurs in bridge watch, the tag
pointed to by tag5 will be activated, and this will activate the dead
man handler in the same way as if tag1 was activated. Decimal
point is 0.
230 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Maintenance
7 MAINTENANCE
7.1 Introduction
This chapter explains how to keep the system in good working
order and what to do if the system fails.
- Overview
- Unit replacement
- Preventive maintenance
- Troubleshooting Remote Operator Stations
- Troubleshooting Midi Operator Stations
- Troubleshooting Local Operator Stations
- Troubleshooting the Watch Calling System
- Troubleshooting Distributed Processing Units
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 231

7.2 Overview
This maintenance chapter is intended for trained maintenance
technicians or engineers with experience of electronic and digital
circuits, computers and electro mechanical design. The level of
information is based on Kongsberg Maritime Ship Systems
maintenance philosophy: The onboard technical personnel shall,
with the help of the documentation and the system’s built-in test
functions, be able to identify malfunctions, locate the fault, and
replace major parts, modules and components on a “Line
Replaceable Unit” (LRU) level. He/she will however not attempt
to repair the LRUs.
Note Cleaning with abrasive material or strong chemical cleaning
solutions is not recommended as these may damage the system.
7.3 Unit replacement

WARNING Turn power off before replacing any parts!
Note DataChief  C20 units are not field repairable. Any attempt will
void the warranty.
Package faulty units using the box from the replacement unit and
send it to Kongsberg Maritime Ship Systems for repair.
→ Refer to page 271 for information on how to get in touch with us.
7.3.1 Recommended tools

Drawings of the installation.
Digital multimeter.
Sensor simulator.
Screwdriver for wire terminals: Flat 3 x 0.7 mm.
Screwdriver for screen termination board: Flat 7 x 1.0 mm.
Screwdriver Pozidriv: POZI #1.
Cable ties.
232 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Maintenance
7.4 Preventive maintenance

7.4.1 General
Kongsberg Maritime Ship Systems recommends the
followingpreventive maintenance routine for the DataChief C20
management:
• Weekly: Clean all operator panels, and run the on-line lamp and
unit function tests. Clean all filters for units equipped with fans.
• 6-Monthly: Check cables and cable entrances, electrical
screw-terminals, fuse connections and plug connections.
• Yearly: Check and if necessary calibrate the input sensors and
output actuators according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
The Classification Societies and/or the Ship’s Maintenance Plan
(or Site’s Maintenance Plan) should be referred to for obtaining a
recommended preventive maintenance schedule for test of
measuring-points and the alarm-system.
Kongsberg Maritime Ship Systems recommends that the operation
of each unit and its functions is checked after any major
maintenance. By major maintenance is understood the removing,
testing, calibrating and re-installing or replacement of pressure
sensors, temperature sensors etc. After this type of maintenance,
we recommend each unit to be re-commissioned according to the
instruction given in this manual.
7.4.2 Weekly maintenance

This maintenance routine applies to units equipped with lamp
and/or function test buttons. Pushing function test buttons will not
interrupt normal system operation. Do the following:
Remote Operator Stations
Each week do the following for each Remote Operator Station:
1 Clean the front of the panel and graphics display unit using
a clean cloth and a solution of warm, mild soapy water - not
too wet.
2 Push LAMP TEST.
- All alarm group and the SYSTEM FAILURE indicators
should be lit and the buzzer turned on for about five seconds.
- If the test fails, refer to the trouble shooting section.
3 If the Remote Operator Station is fitted with an external air
filter, clean it.
- Additional preventive maintenance procedures, if any to be
carried out as described in the manufacturers manual for
each unit.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 233

Midi Operator Station

Each week do the following for each Midi Operator Station:
1 Clean the surface of the Midi Operator Station and display
screen. Wipe the surfaces with a clean damp cloth. For
heavier cleaning, use a clean, damp cloth which has been
dipped in a solution of a mild dish detergent and water.
Wring out firmly before wiping the unit. Never use cleaning
solutions containing spirit or alcohol.
Local Operator Stations

Each week do the following for each Local Operator Station:
1 Clean the front of the unit using a clean cloth and a solution
of warm, mild soapy water - not too wet.
2 Push TEST and then ENTER.
- All indicators should be lit and the buzzer turned on.
3 Push SOUND OFF.
- Use SELECT UP and SELECT DOWN to turn indicators
and buzzer on and off.
4 Push MENU UP to exit the test.
5 Push SELECT DOWN and ENTER.
6 Push each button and verify that the button function is
printed on the display.
7 Push TEST to exit.
- If the test fails, refer to trouble shooting section.
Watch Calling System

Each week do the following for each Watch Bridge and Watch
Cabin Unit:
1 Clean the front of the unit using a clean cloth and a solution
of warm, mild soapy water - not too wet.
2 Push LAMP TEST.
3 All indicators should be lit and the buzzer turned on. The
display (if any) should display configuration data.
- If the test fails, refer to the trouble shooting section.
- If one or more LEDs fail to illuminate or the buzzer is silent,
replace the unit.
Distributed Processing Units

The distributed processing units do not require weekly
maintenance.
234 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Maintenance
7.4.3 6-monthly maintenance

Where applicable; check the following parts of the system each
6-month period:
1 Check cables and cable entrances for dammage to the cable.
2 Tighten all electrical screw-terminals.
3 Tighten all plug connections.
7.4.4 Yearly maintenance

Each year, check and if necessary calibrate the input sensors and
output actuators according to the manufacturer’s instructions. In
general, it is not necessary to re-calibrate sensors if the input signal
is correct. Compare the input signal to this system, with the input
signals on other systems or local gauges. Sensors can be calibrated
in two ways; by calibrating the sensor or the signal itself, or by
calibrating the signal using the software calibration tool built into
the DataChief C20. The calibration software is accessible from
the “Tag Details” menu on the Remote Operator Station, or from
the Local Operating Station when available.
Refer to the Classification Societies and/or the Ship’s Maintenance
Plan (or Site’s Maintenance Plan) for obtaining a recommended
preventive maintenance schedule for test of measuring-points and
the alarm-system. The societies normally recommend a 3-monthly
to 6-monthly schedule.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 235

7.5 Troubleshooting Remote Operator Stations
7.5.1 How to use the Service console

program
Introduction
Caution The Service console program should only be used by trained
personnel. Improper use may seriously degrade the performance
of the DataChief  C20 system.
The main functions of Service console are:
• Start Remote Operator Station(s).
• Stop Remote Operator Station(s).
• Copy databases containing the systems configuration data from
Remote Operator Station 1 to selected Remote Operator
Station(s).
• Copy project specific software from Remote Operator Station
1 to selected Remote Operator Station(s).
• Copy any selected files.
• Back-up selected project data.
• Restore project data from back-up files.
• Install updates to the system software (service packs) to the
Remote Operator Stations.
• Check the status of installed software in selected Remote
Operator Stations against Remote Operator Station 1
Note When installing/copying files the Remote Operator Station copied
to must be stopped.
236 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Maintenance
Explanation to the System Information Display

To start the Service console program go to the System information
display dialog.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 237

Explanation to the main dialog

The following two illustrations briefly explains the main functions
of the main dialog. Consult the operating procedures for step by
step procedures on how to use it.
238 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Maintenance
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 239

Explanation to the Backup dialog

Dialog to specify the type of files and destination for the back-up.
How to start Service console

At Remote Operator Station 1 do the following:
1 Push the System Information Display button.
2 Select Service console.
3 Type in the password and push enter.
- The main Service console window is displayed.
How to stop Remote Operator Stations

When installing/copying files the Remote Operator Station copied
to must be stopped. At Remote Operator Station 1 do the
following:
1 Use the trackball and trackball-buttons to select Remote
Operator Stations.
2 Push the Stop Station button.
- The selected Remote Operator Stations are stopped.
How to start Remote Operator Stations

After copying files into Remote Operator Station(s), restart it. At
the Remote Operator Station 1 do the following:
1 Use the trackball and trackball button to select Remote
Operator Stations.
2 Push the Start Station button.
- The selected Remote Operator Stations are started.
240 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Maintenance
How to copy the database

The following describes how to copy the database from Remote
Operator Station 1 to selected Remote Operator Station(s). At
Remote Operator Station 1 do the following:
Operator Station(s).
2 Push the Stop Stations button.
3 Push the Copy Database button.
- The database is copied into the selected Remote Operator
Station(s).
4 Push the Start Stations button.
How to copy project software
The following describes how to copy the project specific software
from Remote Operator Station 1 to selected Remote Operator
Station(s). At Remote Operator Station 1 do the following:
3 Push the Copy Project SW button.
- The project specific software is copied into the selected
Remote Operator Station(s).
How to copy files into Remote Operator Stations
The following describes how to copy files from Remote Operator
Station 1 to selected Remote Operator Station(s). At Remote
Operator Station 1 do the following:
3 Push the Copy Files button.
- The Select Files to Copy dialog is displayed.
4 Select the required files and push Open.
- The files are copied into the selected Remote Operator
Station(s).
How to update differences
The following describes how to update file differences between
Remote Operator Station 1 and the selected Remote Operator
Station(s). At Remote Operator Station 1 do the following:
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 241


3 Push the Update Diffs button.
- All files with differences from those in Remote Operator
Station 1 are copied into the selected Remote Operator
Station(s).
How to back-up project data

The following describes how to back-up project data from Remote
Operator Station 1 either to a specified path on the hard disk or to
floppy disk. At the Remote Operator Station 1 do the following:
1 Push the Backup button.
- The Backup dialog is displayed.
2 Do one of the following:
* Select a group from the pull-down Filter menu or
* Select the relevant file types under Include.
3 If you want the back-up on floppy disk, insert a disk and push
to disks(A).
4 If you want the back-up to a different path than c:\Ros push
Advanced and type in the path.
5 Push the Make Backup button.
- The back-up is created as specified.
How to restore project data

The following describes how to restore project data to Remote
Operator Station 1 either from a specified path on the hard disk or
from floppy disk. At the Remote Operator Station 1 do the
following:
1 Use the trackball and trackball-buttons to select all Remote
Operator Stations.
3 Push the Restore button.
- The Restore dialog is displayed.
4 If the back-up is on floppy disk insert it and select the files
to restore.
5 Push the Restore button.
- The files are restored as specified.
242 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Maintenance
How to install service a service pack

The following describes how to install a service pack on your
DataChief C20. The service pack is installed on all Remote
Operator Stations simultaneously. At the Remote Operator Station
1 do the following:
1 Use the trackball and trackball-buttons to select all Remote
Operator Station.
3 Push the Install button.
4 Select the file(s) to install.
- The service pack is unzipped and distributed to all Remote
Operator Stations.
7.5.2 How to set up a Remote Operator

Station from an image file
1 Turn power to the Remote Operator Station off.
2 Put the CD with the Remote Operator Station image file CD
into the CD-ROM reader and the boot floppy disk into the
floppy-drive.
3 Turn power on.
- The image program will then guide you through the process
of restoring the software.
Note If the hard disc has defects, it is not possible to restore the Remote
Operator Station from an image file.
How to set up the Local Area Network

Use 3 COM cards for all Local Area Network connections.
1 Install both cards before turning power on.
- This ensures that all Remote Operator Stations get the same
IRQ address for the same network card.
- This means that network cards for network A and B has the
same position on all Remote Operator Stations.
2 Connect a PC keyboard to the Remote Operator Station.
3 Push the Windows button, point to Settings and click
Control panel.
4 Click on Network.
5 Select Protocol tab.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 243

6 Confirm that Network Protocol is: TCP/IP Protocol

7 Click OK and OK again.
8 Close the Control panel window.
How to set the Remote Operator Station name

To set up a Remote Operator Station in a Network it needs a name.
To set up computer name do the following:
Control panel.
3 Click on Network.
4 Select Folder identification tab.
5 Type in the Remote Operator Station name.
- Remote Operator Stations use the following names: ROS1,
ROS2, ROS3 etc.
6 In Workgroup, type in ROS.
7 Click Apply, and then click OK and OK again.
How to set the IP address

To set up the Remote Operator Station for dual Local Area
Network, a specified IP address must be inserted for each LAN
card. Do the following to set the IP address:
Control panel.
3 Click on Network.
4 Select the Protocols tab.
5 Under Adapter select the Local Area Network card you
want to configure. One of these:
- [1] 3 Com Etherlink XL NIC (3C900B-COMBO)
- [2] 3 Com Etherlink XL NIC (3C900B-COMBO)
6 Tick off Specify an IP address.
7 Type in an IP address according to the table below.
8 Type in a Subnet Mask.
244 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Maintenance
IP--Address LAN A IP--Address LAN B

ROS1 172.17.0.100 172.16.0.100
ROS2 172.17.0.101 172.16.0.101
ROS3 172.17.0.102 172.16.0.102
Subnet Mask 255.255.0.0 255.255.0.0
9 Click Apply, and then click OK and OK again.

7.5.3 How to shut down a Remote

Operator Station
To avoid malfunctions, follow this procedure:
2 Push the Windows button, point to and click Stop DCC20.
3 Push the Windows button, point to and click Shut Down.
4 Click OK.
5 Power will automatically shut off.
7.5.4 How to replace colour graphics

displays
A number of different types and sizes of colour graphics displays
using both CRT (Cathode Ray Tube) and flat panels can be used
with the DataChief C20. The display must how ever be able to
handle a screen resolution of 1024 x 768 pixels. Also consider that
the new display must fit into the space available. Do the following:
1 Make sure the colour graphics display is turned off.
2 Disconnect the power cable and then the data cable.
3 Remove the colour graphics display.
4 Place the new colour graphics display in the place of the old
one.
5 Connect the data cable and then the power cable.
6 Turn the colour graphics display on.
- Confirm that it is working correctly.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 245

7.5.5 How to replace printers

We recommend that the replacement printer is of the same make
and model as the old one. However a number of different printers
can be used with the DataChief C20. If you change the type of
printer used, a new printer driver must be installed in the PC
driving the printer. To do this follow the instructions provided with
the printer. Keep in mind that the new printer must fit into the space
available. Do the following:
1 Make sure the printer is turned off.
2 Disconnect the power cable and then the data cable.
3 Remove the printer.
4 Place the new printer in the place of the old one.
5 Connect the data cable and then the power cable.
6 Turn the printer on.
7 Print any log.
- Confirm that the printer is working correctly.
7.5.6 How to replace Operator Control

Panels
All Operator Control Panels are identical except for the labels
inside the pushbuttons. It is recommended to order replacement
panels with the labels for your configuration already installed. In
your order specify the ship name or yard and hull number.
It is possible to remove the labels from the defective unit and install
them in the new unit, but as this is difficult we do not recommend
it. Do the following:
1 Remove the mounting screws.
2 Lift the panel up.
3 Disconnect the power cable and then the three data cables.
4 Place the new panel in the place of the old one.
5 Connect the three data cables and then the power cable.
6 Put the panel back in it’s place.
7 Mount the screws securely.
8 Test that the Operator Control Panel is working correctly.
7.5.7 How to replace Remote Operator

Station PCs
Replacement PCs must be ordered from us specifying the ship
name or yard and hull number, and which of the Remote Operator
station the PC belongs to (ROS1, ROS2, etc.). We will then set up
the PC with your system configuration and the correct hardware
interfaces.
246 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Maintenance
It is possible to configure a PC onboard. This how ever requires a

service or commissioning engineer. Any attempt to do this will
void the warranty.
Replacement
1 Shut the PC down and turn power off.
2 Disconnect the power cable and then the data cables noting
down exactly where each cable goes.
3 Remove all printed circuit boards in the card slots noting
down exactly where each card goes.
4 Place the new PC in the place of the old one.
5 Install the printed circuit cards in the same locations as in the
old PC.
6 Connect the data cables and then the power cable.
7 Turn the PC on.
7.5.8 How to install the Remote

Operator Station software
Use the following procedure when you have replaced the hard disk
or when you have re-installed Windows NT.
Note Do not attempt this procedure unless you are very familiar with the
Windows operating system.
Before you start any action, verify that you have a disk image
CD-ROM marked DC60052.0x (x is the number of the software
version installed in your system) and a service pack located on a
set of floppy disks or a CD-ROM marked DC60052.
Install the disk image

The disk image is a CD-ROM containing the software that was
installed in your system at commissioning time. Do the
following:
1 Connect a standard PC keyboard to the Operator Control
Panel.
2 Insert the disk image CD-ROM, marked DC60052.0x.
3 On the monitor click Start, point to Shut Down, and select
Restart.
- The PC will restart booting from the CD-ROM. The program
EasyRestore will automatically start.
4 Answer Yes/OK to questions, and then let the program run.
- After about ten minutes you will be asked to restart the PC.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 247

5 Answer Yes/OK.
Set the LAN address and computer name

Remote Operator Stations use the following computer names
and Local Area Network addresses:
Computer name LAN IP address LAN IP address
Adapter 1/LAN A Adapter 2/LAN B
ROS 1 172.17.0.100 172.16.0.100
ROS 2 172.17.0.101 172.16.0.101
ROS 3 172.17.0.102 172.16.0.102
ROS 4 172.17.0.103 172.16.0.103
...
Do the following:
6 On the monitor click My Computer, and then click Control
Panel.
7 Double-click on Network, and then click the Protocols tab.
8 Click Properties, select each network adapter and set the IP
address according to the table above.
9 When finished, click OK.
10 Click the Identification tab, and then Change.
11 Modify the computer name to ROSn (where n is the number
of this Remote Operator Station), click OK.
12 Click OK again.
13 When asked to reboot, answer Yes.
- The Remote Operator Station will reboot.
14 If you experience problems with the desktop shortcuts for
Start-up DCC20, Shutdown DCC20, or RioLoad see
What to do if you have problems with desktop shortcuts
below.
Install the latest service pack

The service pack is located on a set of floppy disks or on a
CD-ROM marked DC60052. It consists of a number of
self-extracting zip files. As an example, service pack
DC60052.07.003 consists of the following files:
* DC60052_07_003_disk#1.exe
* DC60052_07_003_disk#2.exe
* DPU 3.02 disk #1.exe
248 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Maintenance

How to install the latest service pack is described under “How to
use the Service console earlier in this chapter.
Copy ship specific files and databases

How to copy ship specific files and databases is described under
“How to use the Service console earlier in this chapter.
Testing the Remote Operator station

Do the following to verify that the Remote Operator Station is now
working correctly:
15 Double-clicking the Startup DCC20 icon.
16 Verify that all items specified in the case ROSn section of
the startup script starts without error messages.
17 Verify that the CAN Interface Server (CIS) starts and loads
the new configuration data into all Distributed Processing
Units it is responsible for.
What to do if you have problems with desktop

shortcuts
When changing the computer name of a PC running Windows NT,
you may experience problems with shortcuts on the desktop, such
as Startup DCC20, Shutdown DCC20, or RioLoad. Typically,
when you double-click on an icon, nothing happens. To solve the
problem do the following for each problem icon:
18 Right-click on the shortcut, select Properties.
19 Select the Shortcut tab.
20 In the Target field, replace \\ROS1\c with
C:\ROS\config\Bin\....
21 In the Start in field, replace \\ROS1\c with
C:\ROS\config\Bin\....
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 249

7.6 How to install the Midi Operator Station

WARNING The Midi operator Station is sealed and
contains no user serviceable parts. Opening the
unit will void the warranty. If the glass in the
screen breaks, be carefull not to cut yourself on
the sharp edges of the glass pieces.
7.6.1 Placement
Figure 135 Midi Operator Station mounting.

Determine the most suitable and convenient place for operation
after considering the following conditions:
* There is limited exposure to direct sunlight to avoid
overheating.
→ Refer to the requirements on page 44 for suitable ambiant
temperatures
* There is good ventilation and minimum vibration.
* The minimum distance to a magnetic compass is 500mm
(20”).
* Sufficient space behind the unit is available to allow
proper cable connections to the rear panel connectors.
250 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Maintenance
7.6.2 Cutout
For flushmount installations use the following cutout.
135 5
95 ø2. s
4pc
240
243
230
132
Figure 136 MOS 33 cutout drawing.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 251

7.6.3 Electrical connections
Power supply connection

* The internal voltage regulator will allow the Midi
Operator Station (MOS 33) to operate normally within
the power supply voltage range from 10 to 32 V DC. A
24 volt power supply is however recommended. The Midi
Operator Station is connected to external power through
the terminal list. The cable length between the terminal
list and the Midi Operator Station is approximately 2
meters. After connecting the cable to the power source,
push the plug as far as it will go into the nine pin
receptacle marked PWR on the rear of the cabinet and
turn the plug’s coupling ring clockwise until it makes a
click.
MOS Terminal list

33
Figure 137 MOS 33 connection drawing.
Fuse
Note A 4.0 Amp slow fuse should always be installed to protect the unit.
CAN bus interface connection

* The CAN bus connection is also made through the
terminal list. Make sure to connect using the correct
polarity. Also make sure the end (CAN) terminator
supplied with the unit stays in place.
252 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Maintenance
7.7 Troubleshooting Midi Operator Stations

WARNING The Midi operator Station is sealed and
contains no user serviceable parts. Opening the
unit will void the warranty. If the glass in the
screen breaks, be carefull not to cut yourself on
the sharp edges of the glass pieces.
7.7.1 Troubleshooting checklist
Symptom Check Remedy

No picture on display Check that the Faultfind supply
screen. supply voltage is voltage.
between 10 – 32
VDC.
Check fuse in power Replace fuse. Use
cable fuse holder. slow type 4.0A slow.
Picture appears on Adjust light/ contrast.
the display screen,
but image is too dark
or too bright.
No normal picture or Disconnect power
key operation. and connect power
again.
Replace unit.
7.7.2 How to replace Midi Operator

Stations
Note Never replace more than one Midi Operator Station at a time!
Do the following:
1 If the unit is flush mounted remove the corners.
2 Remove mounting screws.
3 Lift the panel out.
4 Disconnect the cables.
5 Replace the unit.
6 Connect the cables.
7 Replace mounting screws securely.
8 Replace corners if these where removed.
Note Configuration can only be done at the master Remote Operator
Station.
9 On the Remote Operator Station, push System Info Display.
10 Use the up/down arrow keys to select Replace Modules and
push Enter.
- The prompt Enter Password is displayed.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 253

11 Type in the password: *****

Note For error detection and replacement purposes the Midi Operator
Station is treated as a DPU (Distributed Processing Unit).
12 Under DPUs with COMM error, select the failed Midi
Operator Station and push Install Replacement DPU.
-
- After a few moments the system indicates Successfully

Replaced DPU. The alarm related to the failing unit
disappears.
13 Confirm that the Midi Operator Panel is working correctly
thtrough operational use.
254 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Maintenance
7.8 Troubleshooting Local Operator Stations
7.8.1 Troubleshooting flow diagram

To troubleshooting the Local Operator Station use the following
flow diagrams to determine the problem:
Start LOS
troubleshooting
Yes
Is the Check Replace the fuse or

SYSTEM FAIL No 24volt power input. Is No reset the circuit
indicator lit? power OK? braker.
Yes Yes
Disconnect and then

reconnect power.
Check the
terminal board The wiring has
Green inside the mounting Red wrong polarity.
frame. Check LED Correct the wiring.
indicator?
Does the Dark Replace the unit.

LOS No
operate?
Yes
Check
Does
the LOS again. Still Yes Contact us for assistance. No
the LOS operate?
failed?
No
END Yes
Figure 138 Local Operator Station troubleshooting flow

diagram.

If you remove the mounting frame to check inside, power must be
turned “ON” to check LED indicator, etc. Take care not to touch
exposed terminal boards and components!
Caution Against equipment damage
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 255

To protect the front of the panel when dismounted, place the panel
front downwards onto a soft cloth.
7.8.2 How to replace Local Operator

Stations
All Local Control Stations are identical, no configuration is
required. Do the following:
3 Unscrew and remove the left side cover plate.
4 Slide the top panel out.
5 Disconnect the cable.
6 Connect the cable for the new unit.
7 Slide it into place - be careful not to dammage the cable.
8 Mount the side cover and screws securely.
9 Test that the Local Operator Panel is working correctly.
7.8.3 How to recommision a Local

Operator Station
- No manual recommissioning is necessary after replacing a
Local Operator Station.
- The Local Operator Station will check the network and
establish contact with the available Distributed Processing
Units automatically.
256 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Maintenance
7.9 Troubleshooting the Watch Calling System
7.9.1 Troubleshooting flow diagrams

The troubleshooting of the Watch Bridge and Watch Cabin Units
are identical. Use the following flow diagrams to determine the
problem:
Start Watch Calling

System troubleshooting
Yes
Is the
ROS working No Troubleshoot the ROS.
correctly?
Yes
Check the mimic display
Watch Calling
configuration 1 of 2.
Yes
Check the ROS interface

Do you have
board to the CAN bus. If
communication with all No OK, troubleshoot the
WBU/WCU units?
CAN network cables .
Yes
Troubleshoot the WBU/
Does the
WCU unit using the next
WBU/WCU panels No troubleshooting flow
operate?
diagram.
Yes
Check
the WCS again. Still No END
failed?
Yes
Contact us for assistance.
Figure 139 Watch Calling System troubleshooting flow

diagram.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 257

Start WBU/WCU
troubleshooting
Yes
Is the Check Replace the fuse or

SYSTEM FAIL No 24volt power input. Is No reset the circuit
indicator lit? power OK? braker.
Yes Yes
Check the mimic

display Watch Calling
configuration 1 of 2. Check the
terminal board The wiring has
Green inside the mounting Red wrong polarity.
frame. Check LED Correct the wiring.
indicator?
Does the Dark Replace the unit.

WBU/WCU No
operate?
Yes
Check Does
the WCS again. Still Yes Contact us for assistance. No the WBU/WCU
failed? operate?
No
END Yes
Figure 140 Watch Bridge or Watch Cabin Unit troubleshooting

flow diagram.
If you remove the mounting frame to check inside, power must be

turned “ON” to check LED indicators, etc. Take care not to touch
exposed terminal boards and components!
Caution Against equipment damage
To protect the front of the panel when dismounted, place the panel
front downwards onto a soft cloth.
258 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Maintenance
7.9.2 How to replace Watch Calling

units
There are two types of Watch Bridge Units and two types of Watch
Cabin Units. For each type all panels are identical exept for the
labels inside the pushbuttons. It is recommended to order
replacement panels with the labels for your configuration already
installed. In your order specify the ship name or yard and hull
number.
It is possible to remove the labels from the defective unit and install
them in the new unit, but as this is difficult we do not recommend
it.
Each On Duty engineer has a group of panels defined as
“belonging” to that engineer-position. These are the panels in
his/her cabin, office and in public areas. When an engineer is On
duty, each of these panels are in On Duty active mode.
Replacement
3 Unscrew and remove the left side cover plate.
4 Slide the top panel out.
5 Disconnect the cable.
6 Note down the LMT address for both the old and the new
unit.
- Each watch calling panel has a unique ID, called an LMT
address. This address is either found on a label placed on the
side of the panel and looks like this:
Figure 141 Label with LMT address
- The LMT address is placed at the bottom of the label, in this

case NORCTRLWCPANEL00000000008453.
- If this label is missing, there should be a smaller label placed
on the bottom of the panel or inside the panel looking like
this:
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 259

Figure 142 Label with last part of LMT address
- The number written at the bottom of the label is last part of

the LMT address, in this case 8453, indicating that the LMT
address is NORCTRLWCPANEL00000000008453.
- If you have a watch calling panel with an LCD display, you
can also find the LMT address by pushing LAMP TEST
(power must be connected). The LMT address is displayed
in line 3 on the LCD display.
7 Connect the cable for the new unit.
8 Slide it into place - be careful not to dammage the cable.
9 Mount the side cover and screws securely.
Configuration
WARNING The following should only be done by trained
personnel.
Note Configuration can only be done from the master Remote Operator
Station.
10 Find the wcall.ini file using the the Windows Explorer.
- It is normally located in the C:\\Ros\Config\Database folder.
11 Double-click the file to open it using the Notepad.
12 Look for a section named Panels that looks something like
this:
[Panels]
Panel1=1,NORCTRLWCPANEL00000000005382
Figure 143 Figure 1.3 The panels section of the wcall.ini file.
13 Locate the LMT address for the panel you replaced.

14 Replace this LMT address with the LMT address of the new
panel.
15 Save the wcall.ini file.
260 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Maintenance
16 Copy the file to the other Remote Operator Stations as

follows:
→ Refer to page 240 for How to start the Service console.
→ Refer to page 241 for How to copy files into Remote Operator
Stations.
17 Each DataChief C20 Remote Operator Station must be
stopped and started again for the changes to take effect.
→ Refer to page 240 for How to stop the Remote Operator Stations.
→ Refer to page 240 for How to start Remote Operator Stations.
18 Test that the Watch Calling unit is working correctly
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 261

7.10 Troubleshooting Distributed Processing

Units
7.10.1 How to handle Distributed

Processing Units error codes
All Distributed Processing Units have Built In Self-Test. These

report errors to the Remote Operator Stations on the system
channel.
- The following table gives an overview of the error codes and

appropriate actions:
Error Error description Action

code
49 RAM fail Replace the module.
48 Transmitter overcurrent (RAi16 Check all channels for
and C1 modules) high current load.
47 Fuse fail (RDi32 and C1 mod- Check all inputs.
ules)
46 Printed circuit board temperature Check the ambient tem-
high perature.
45 Parameter flash memory failure Reset the module and
try again. If failing again,
replace the module.
CAN 1 -- plug X8:
40 CAN controller busoff
39 CAN controller error status set
38 CAN controller overrun
37 Rx queue overrun Check CAN connections
36 HP Tx queue overrun
35 LP Tx queue overrun
34 Transmit fault
CAN 2 -- plug X9:
30 CAN controller busoff
29 CAN controller error status set
28 CAN controller overrun
27 Rx queue overrun Check CAN connections
26 HP Tx queue overrun
25 LP Tx queue overrun
24 Transmit fault
262 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Maintenance
7.10.2 How to handle Distributed

Processing Units communication
errors
When the Remote Operator Station gives a communication error
for one of the Distributed Processing Units. Do the following:
1 Locate the Distributed Processing Unit.
2 Check LED power and status indicators.
Figure 144 LED power indicator. Green indicates that power is

available and red that the power has wrong polarity.
Figure 145 LED status indicators.
3 Read the status for each indicator above and check it against
the table below.
LED indicators
Run Watch Info. End Init. Power
Fault type: dog
Normal Green Dark Flashing Green Green
operation yellow
No applica- Dark Red Dark Green Green
tion loaded
Not initialised Dark Red Dark Dark Green
Application Dark Red Dark Green Green
stopped
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 263

Power has Dark Dark Dark Dark Red

wrong polarity
No power Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark
4 Follow the action for the fault you found as described below.
Normal operation
Indicators lit: Run (Green), Info. (flashing yellow), End Init.
(green) and Power (green).
- The unit seems to be working OK.
1 Check the cabling.
2 Restart the unit by turning power off and then on again.
3 It the Remote Operator Station is still reporting an error
replace the module. See procedure below.
No application loaded
Indicators lit: Watch Dog (red), End Init. (green) and Power
(green).
1 Return the item to us.
Not initialised
Indicators lit: Watch Dog (red) and Power (green)
1 Reload the application from a Remote Operator Station.
2 If the the same indicators are still lit, replace the module. See
procedure below.
Application stopped
Indicators lit: Watch Dog (red) and End Init (green)
1 Restart the unit by turning power off and then on again.
2 If the Watch Dog indicator is still lit replace the module. See
procedure below.
Power connected with wrong polarity

Indicators lit: Power (red)
1 Correct the power polarity and check again.
2 If the Power indicator is still red, replace the module. See
procedure below.
No power
Indicators lit: None
264 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Maintenance
1 Check power supply and wiring.

2 If the power supply and wiring is OK, replace the module.
See procedure below.
7.10.3 How to start or stop Remote

Operator Stations
Caution Only to be used by trained personnel. The functionality found
here will allow you to stop the complete Alarm and monitoring
system with process control and power management!
2 Use the up/down arrow keys to select Start DC modules and
push Enter.
- The following window is displayed.
4 From the list, select the Remote Operator Station you want
to start or stop.
5 Under Start/Stop Stations push the appropriate button.
- Run State will indicate the status of the selected unit.
Figure 146 Window for starting or stopping of Remote

Operator Stations.
7.10.4 How to configure a new DPU

channel
Use the following procedure to add an alarm channel to the
DataChief C20.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 265

1 Find a DPU (Distributed Processing Unit) with a spare

channel of the correct type.
In the engine-room
2 Wire the sensor to the spare channel.
At the remote operator station

3 Push the System Info Display button.
4 Use the up/down arrow keys to select Unit Display (if not
already selected) and push Enter.
- The prompt Enter unit number: is displayed on the lower
left side of the colour graphics display.
5 Type in the number of the selected DPU and push Enter.
- The information about the selected DPU is displayed
6 Use the up/down arrow keys to select the spare channel.
7 Push the Tag details button.
8 Select the Advanced tag details tab using the trackball.
9 Select tag description.
10 Enter the commissioning password: *****
11 Push Enter.
12 Change the tag description to give it a relevant name for the
new alarm.
For analogue channels

13 Under the Advanced Tag Details tab change for example:
* Engineering unit type
* Engineering unit high
* Engineering unit low
14 Under the Tag Details tab change for example:
* Logs, delays and alarm limits as relevant.
266 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Maintenance
Figure 147 Advanced tag details for an analog channel.
Figure 148 Tag details for an analog channel.
For digital channels

15 Under the Tag Details tab change for example:
* Logs and delays
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 267

Figure 149 Advanced tag details for an digital channel.
Figure 150 Tag details for an digital channel.

Disable commissioning access
16 When finished push the System Info Display button.
17 Use the up/down arrow keys to select Commissioning and
push Enter.
- The prompt Enter 0 to disable commissioning access: is
displayed on the lower left side of the colour graphics
display.
268 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Maintenance
18 Type in 0 and push Enter.

- Commissioning status changes from Yes to No.
7.10.5 How to replace Distributed

Processing Units
Note Never replace more than one DPU unit at a time!
All DPUs look very similar. Make sure the replacement unit is of
exactly the same type as the failing unit. Type specification is
available on the label for each unit. Do the following:
1 Remove the screws for the termination bracket.
2 Disconnect all connectors.
Figure 151 Electrical disconnection.
Figure 152 Mechanical disconnection.

4 Install the replacement unit.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 269


6 Use the up/down arrow keys to select Replace Modules and
push Enter.
7 Type in the password: *****
8 Under DPUs with COMM error, select the failed unit and
push Install Replacement DPU.
- After a few moments the system indicates Successfully

Replaced DPU. The alarm related to the failing unit
disappears.
9 Confirm that the DPU is working correctly.
270 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Replaceable parts
8 REPLACEABLE PARTS
8.1 Introduction
This chapter contains a list of spare parts available for the
DataChief C20 including part numbers. Not all parts are listed
her, only those defined as Line Replaceable Units (LRU) to be
changed by on-board maintenance personnel. Information on
configuration settings is also included.
8.2 How to get in touch with us

Should you need to get in touch with us for any reason use the
following addressing information:
Kongsberg Maritime Ship Systems
Bekkajordet 8 A
P.O. Box 1009
N-3194 Horten, NORWAY
Telephone switchboard: +47 33 03 20 00
Telephone 24 hours service: +47 91 52 80 82
Fax: +47 85 02 80 82
E-mail for service: service@kmss.no
E-mail for spare parts: spares@kmss.no
8.3 Consumable spare Parts

Air filter for Remote Operator Station 2603925
PC fan for Remote Operator Station 3900282
Box printer paper 2500 sheet A4-size 1200002
8.4 Modules
MOS33 - Midi Operator Station 4403239
WBU - LCD type with 6 alarm groups 8100114
WBU - LED type with 16 alarm groups 8100131
WCU - LCD type with 6 alarm groups 8100138
WCU - LED type with 16 alarm groups 8100141
RAi-16 - Remote Analogue input module 8100148
RAi-10TC - Remote Analogue input thermo coupler 8100161
RDi-32 - Remote Digital input module 8100154
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 271

RDi-32a - Remote Digital input module 8100172

RAo-8 - Remote Analogue output module 8100153
RDo-16 - Remote Digital output module 8100155
RIo-C1 - Remote Input Output module 8100181
RIo-C2 - Remote Input Output module 8100182
RIo-C3-GP - Generator Protection 8100251
RIo-C3-GDCP - Generator & Diff. Current Protection 8100225
RIo-C4 - Generator Protection module 8100226
VCC 440 - Voltage Converter Controller module 8100242
dPSC - Dual Process Segment Controller 8100183
PSS - Process Segment StarCoupler 8100184
LOS - Local Operator Station 8100158
UPS SMPS 700 V 220vac/24vdc 28A 3800248
UPS 220vac / 24vdc 10 A for cabinet montage 3800334
UPS 220/220vac 50/60Hz 780VA Eltech, Pulsar 3800351
UPS 220/220vac 50/60Hz 1080VA Eltech, Pulsar 3800352
8.5 Plugs and accessories

4 Pole connector 3401038
12Pole connector 3401290
Cross connection link for power and CAN 3100295
Termination resistor 120 ohm 5100091
8.6 Other spare parts

Colour graphics display
A number of different types and sizes of colour graphics displays
can be used with the DataChief C20. The minimum requirements
to these are:
272 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Replaceable parts
• Screen resolution: 1024 x 768 pixels

To order a replacement unit specify the following information:
• Colour graphics display size (17”, 19”, 21” or bigger both CRT
and flat screen types are available).
Remote Operator Station computer

The personal computer unit forming part of the Remote Operator
Station is loaded with DataChief C20 system software and
configuration software unique for each vessel. To order a
replacement unit specify the following information:
• Vessel name.
• Ship yard name.
• Hull number.
• Where located on the ship
8.7 Configuration settings

There are no hardware configuration settings such as dip switches
for any of the modules.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 273

8.8 Drawings
This chapter contains drawings refered to in other parts of the
manual:
- Local Operator Station
- Midi Operator Station
- Watch Bridge Unit
- Watch Cabin Unit
- RAi-16 - Remote Analogue input module
- RAi-10TC - Remote Analogue input thermo coupler
- RDi-32 - Remote Digital input module
- RDi-32a - Remote Digital input module
- RAo-8 - Remote Analogue output module
- RDo-16 - Remote Digital output module
- RIo-C1 - Remote Input Output module
- RIo-C2 - Remote Input Output module
- RIo-C3 - Generator protection module
- dPSC - Dual Process Segment Controller
274 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Replaceable parts
Local Operator Station,

Watch Bridge Unit &
Watch Cabin Unit
Note:
Rotate end covers 180 deg. to change between flush and
wall mounting. Use countersunk head screws.
Mounting screws: M5
Cable connections: 2.5 mm 2 screw terminals
Supply Voltage: 18 - 32 V DC
Consumption: 6W maximum
Unit weight: 1.4kg
Temperature range: - 15 Deg. C to +70 Deg. C
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 275

MOS33 Midi Operator Station
Mounting
Mountingscrews:
screws:M5 M5
Cableconnections:
Cable connections: Through
through plug plug
SupplyVoltage:
Supply Voltage: 18 -18
32-V32DCV DC
Consumption: 10 10W
Consumption: maximum
W maximum
Unit weight:
Unit weight: 1.5 kg
1.0kg
Temperature range:
Temperature range: -10 Deg.
-15 Deg. C to
C to +70 +50
Deg. C Deg. C
276 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Replaceable parts
RAi--16 Remote Analogue input module
Note:
Unscrew shield termination bracket and plugs when
replacing the unit - do not disconnect the cables.
Unscrew and rotate the label to change the reading

direction.
Mounting screws: M5
Unit weight: 2.0kg
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 277

RAi--10tc Remote Analogue input module
Note:

direction.
Mounting screws: M5
Unit weight: 1.8 kg
278 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Replaceable parts
RDi--32 & 32a Remote Digital input module
Note:

direction.
Mounting screws: M5
Unit weight: 1.8kg
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 279

RAo--8 Remote Analogue output module
Note:

direction.
Mounting screws: M5
Unit weight: 1.5kg
280 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Replaceable parts
RDo--16 Remote Digital output module
Note:

direction.
Mounting screws: M5
Unit weight: 2.0kg
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 281

RIO--C1 Remote Input Output module
Note:

direction.
Mounting screws: M5
Unit weight: 2.0 kg
282 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Replaceable parts
RIO--C2 Remote Input Output module
Note:

direction.
Mounting screws: M5
Unit weight: 1.8 kg
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 283

RIO--C3 Generator protection
Note:

direction.
Mounting screws: M5
Consumption: 15 W maximum
Unit weight: 2.0 kg
284 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Replaceable parts
RIO--C4 Generator monitoring and control
Note:

direction.
Mounting screws: M5
Consumption: 15 W maximum
Unit weight: 2.0 kg
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 285

VCC Voltage Converter Controller
Note:

direction.
Mounting screws: M5
Unit weight: 1.8kg
286 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Replaceable parts
dPSC Dual Process Segment Controller
Note:

direction.
Mounting screws: M5
Unit weight: 1.6 kg
Temperature range: -15 Deg. C to +70 Deg. C
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 287

9 APPENDIX
9.1 Introduction
This appendix contains definitions, abbreviations and references
used in this document.
- Abbreviations
- References
288 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Appendix
9.2 Abbreviations
9.2.1 General
AC Alternating Current
BIST Built In System Test
CAN Control Area Network
CE Communite Europeen
CD Compact Disc
CCR Cargo Control Room
dPSC Dual Process Segment Controller
DC DataChief
DPU Distributed Processing Unit
ECR Engine Control Room
EMC Electro Magnetic Compatibility
EMD European union Maritime Directorate
GUI Graphic User Interface
IACS International Assocciation of Class Societies
IMO International Maritime Organisation
I/O Input/Output
IFH Instrument Failure High alarm
IFL Instrument Failure Low alarm
IP Ingress Protection
KMSS Kongsberg Maritime Ship Systems
LAN Local area Network
LAS Local Alarm System
LCD Liquid Crystal Display
LED Light Emitting Diode
LOS Local Operator Station
LRU Line Replaceable Unit
MCU Main Computer Unit
NC Normal Closed
NO Normal Open
OCP Operator Control Panel
PC Personal Computer
PCB Printed Circuit Board
PDO Process Data Object
PDS Process Data Segment
PLC Programmable Logic Controller
PMS Power Management System
PSS Process Segment Starcoupler
RAi Remote Analogue Input unit
RAi tc Remote Analogue Input unit for termo couplers
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 289

RAO Remote Analogue Output unit

RDI Remote Digital Input unit
RDO Remote Digital Output unit
ROS Remote Operator Station
SGW System Gateway
UMS Unmanned Machinery Space
UPS Uninterruptible Power Supply
UTC Coordinated Universal Time
WBU Watch Bridge Unit
WCU Watch Cabin Unit
9.2.2 Alarm list abbreviations

The following is a list of abbreviations used in alarm list in
Remote- and Local Operator Stations.
Analogue sensors
OffSc Offscan alarm. Indicates that the input signal is not
checked for alarm situations and is not measured any
more.
Grad Gradient alarm. The input signal is changing rapidly.
Low Low alarm. When the input signal is lower than a set
limit.
Lo-Lo Low-Low alarm. When the input signal is lower than
a set limit.
High High alarm. When the input signal is higher than a set
limit.
Hi-Hi High-High alarm. When the input signal is lower than
a set limit.
IFL Instrument failure low alarm. Used for example when
a 4 to 20 mA current loop is giving less than 4 mA.
IFH Instrument failure high alarm. Used for example when
a 4 to 20 mA current loop is giving more than 20 mA.
Inhib Inhibit. The input signal has been inhibited to avoid
unnecessary alarms such as when the main engine is
stopped.
Digital sensors
OffSc Offscan alarm. Indicates that the input signal is not
checked for alarm situations.
Open The switch is open, such as ”valve open”
Closed The switch is closed, such as ”valve closed”
290 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Appendix
Short The wiring to the sensor has a short-circuit

Broken The wiring to the sensor has a open-circuit
Inhib Inhibit. The input signal has been inhibited to avoid
unnecessary alarms such as when the main engine is
stopped.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 291

9.3 References
DataChief C20
Instruction manual
Document number: AD-0376
Item number: 0400150
DataChief C20
Alarm and monitoring system with process control
Instruction manual
DataChief C20
Alarm and monitoring system with power management
Instruction manual
DataChief C20
management
Instruction manual
292 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Instruction manual
Blank page
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 293

________________________________________________________________________________________________
DataChief C20 Instruction manual
Alarm and monitoring system with process control and power management
________________________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________________________
294 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Blank page
Document printing instructions
This page and all pages hereafter are not part of
the manual and should not be printed!
1 The whole document including the front page is a

single PDF-file with the document number AD-0377.
2 Print the front page in colour.
3 The rest of the document should be printed in black
& white, 2-sided printing.
4 References is the last section that is part of the
document, after that there is various useful
information not normally printed.
5 The sheet before this one contains labels for the
spine of binders.
6 The following page(s) containing “TAGS” is used for
internal document updating purposes only.
Tags - DO NOT PRINT!
Kilde: Library I7 -
Ansvar: Kjell Grøntoft
Dokument historie:
01.02.2002 released
Brukt:
AD-0377 DataChief C20
reg.no bok
Version: Ingen
Andre attributter i bruk: Ingen
DataChief C20 AMS
Denne siden innehloder alle tags som er brukt i manualen.
1 Functional description
2 Getting started
3 Operating information
4 Reference guide
5 Maintenance
6 Replaceable parts
7 Appendix
Filnavn Nivå Tag Kommentar

Intro 1 c20_funcdes_01 Introduction
3 c20_funcdes_02 MOS tech spec.
Getting started
Intro 1 c20_getstrt_01 Introduction
ROS 3 c20_getstrt_02 Understanding the Re-
mote Operator Station
display.
c20_getstrt_03 Access levels MOS
Intro 1 c20_operate_01 Introduction
ROS 3 c20_operate_02 How to access the
Watch Calling configur-
ation.
3 c20_operate_03 How to enable resetting
of counters
3 c20_operate_04 How to display system
information
3 c20_operate_05 How to change time
zone
3 c20_operate_06 How to change tag
parameters for an ana-
logue channel
parameters for a digital
channel
3 c20_operate_08 How to set the intervall
for selected points log
parameters
1 c20_pcs_01 Introduction

1 c20_pms_01 Introduction
Reference Guide
Intro 1 c20_refguid_01 Introduction
3 c20_refguid_02 Exhaust mean value tag
items
Maintenance
Intro 1 c20_maint_01 Introduction
4 c20_maint_02 How to start Service
console
4 c20_maint_03 How to copy files into
Remote Operator Sta-
tions.
4 c20_maint_04 How to stop Remote
Operator Stations
4 c20_maint_05 How to start Remote
Operator Stations
Replaceable parts
Intro 1 c20_parts_01 Introduction
Appendix
Intro 1 c20_append_01 Introduction

DataChief C20 Instruction

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

DataChief C20 Instruction

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

AD-0377 / Item number 0400151 /

Rev Date Written by Checked by Approved by

The original signatures are recorded in the company’s logistic database.

2 Open his mouth and check for and remove

While shouting for help, remove the source of

Commence first aid on the spot. Continue to shout

COMBINING EMC AND ARTIFICIAL DO YOU KNOW WHAT TO DO?

WARNING Lethal voltages

Manufacturer Kongsberg Maritime Ship Systems AS

Figure 1 DataChief  C20 Remote Operator Station

3 Alarm and monitoring system

4 Process control system

5 Power management system

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 IX

Rev.A First edition.

X AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 XI

1.6.13 Remote Input/Output (RIO--C2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

XII AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

3 ALARM AND MONITORING SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 XIII

3.2.35 How to select the Watch Responsible location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

XIV AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

3.5.3 How to call the ON DUTY engineer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 XV

4.3.7 How to operate the one touch auto sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

XVI AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

6.4 Preventive maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 XVII

7.3 Consumable spare Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

XVIII AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

1.1.1 Software version

Figure 2 Typical engine control room fitted with

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 1

Note This document describes the DataChief  C20 Alarm and

The system is based on Kongsberg Maritime Ship Systems unified

2 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

1.3 Design principles

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 3

• Return to normal detection.

4 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Alarm and monitoring displays

1.3.2 Building blocks

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 5

• Dual redundant Local Area Network: Used for

1.3.3 Decentralised system architecture

6 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

To configure the tasks for a specific Distributed Processing Unit

ACCOMODATION WHEELHOUSE ENGINE CONTROL ROOM

Fleetmaster ROS ROS ROS ROS ROS ROS

Figure 3 Typical configuration drawing for a passenger vessel.

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 7

The Distributed Processing Units have been designed for

1.3.4 Centralised operation

8 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Advanced facilities can also be provided for unmanned machinery

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003 9

The local area network included as part of DataChief C20 can

WCU 16 group UPS 220 VAC UPS 24 VDC UPS 24 VDC

DPU DPU DPU DPU

RESET DPU DPU DPU DPU

DPU DPU DPU DPU

Figure 4 Configuration drawing for an oil tanker.

10 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003